Operator's Manual: Wheel Loader

Operator’s Manual
Wheel loader
750T
Machine model 346-11
From serial no. 346 11 0001
Version 2.0
Document number 1000187267
Language [us]
Documentation
Documents Order no. Order no.

Operator’s Manual [us] 1000187267
Legend
Original Operator’s Manual x
Translation of original
–
Operator’s Manual
Version 2.0
Date 04/2014
Document BA 34611 US
Copyright – 2014 Kramer-Werke GmbH

Printed in Germany
All rights reserved, in particular the copyright, the right of reproduction and the right of distribution applicable
worldwide.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, translated or used in any form or by any means – graphic,
electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording, taping or information storage or retrieval systems –
without prior permission in writing from the manufacturer.
No reproduction or translation of this publication, in whole or part, without the written consent of
KRAMER-WERKE GmbH.
Violations of legal regulations, in particular of the copyright protection, shall be subject to civil and criminal
prosecution.
KRAMER-WERKE GmbH keep abreast of the latest technical developments and constantly improve their
products. For this reason, we may from time to time need to make changes to diagrams and descriptions in this
documentation which do not reflect products that have already been delivered and that will not be implemented
on these machines.
Technical data, dimensions and weights are only given as an indication. Responsibility for errors or omissions
not accepted.
The cover features the machine with possible optional equipment.
Exclusively built for Wacker Neuson.
Kramer-Werke GmbH
Wacker-Neuson-Str. 1
D-88630 Pfullendorf
Tel. 0080090209020
E-mail [email protected]
www.kramer.de
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
Information on this Operator’s Manual ..................................................................... 1-1
Abbreviations/symbols ....................................................................................... 1-1
Machine overview .................................................................................................... 1-2
Models and trade names (overview) ........................................................................ 1-3
Brief description of the wheel loader ........................................................................ 1-3
Main components of machine ............................................................................ 1-3
Hydrostatic drive ................................................................................................ 1-4
Operating hydraulics and 4 wheel steering ....................................................... 1-4
Cooling system .................................................................................................. 1-4
Fields of application and using the wheel loader with an attachment ...................... 1-5
Attachments with certified material densities ..................................................... 1-5
Type labels and component numbers ...................................................................... 1-7
Serial number and type label ............................................................................. 1-7
Cabin registration number ................................................................................. 1-7
Engine serial number ......................................................................................... 1-7
Serial number of hydraulic pump ....................................................................... 1-8
Serial number of hydraulic motor ....................................................................... 1-8
Serial number of rear axle ................................................................................. 1-8
Serial number of front axle ................................................................................ 1-8
Labels (overview) ..................................................................................................... 1-9
Signs and symbols ................................................................................................. 1-10
Labels on the outside of the machine .............................................................. 1-10
Labels inside the cabin .................................................................................... 1-11
Labels in the engine compartment .................................................................. 1-14
Safety instructions 2
Safety symbols in this manual ................................................................................. 2-1
Designated use ........................................................................................................ 2-2
General conduct and safety instructions .................................................................. 2-2
Conditions for use .............................................................................................. 2-2
Operator training and knowledge ...................................................................... 2-3
Preparing for use ............................................................................................... 2-3
Modifications and spare parts ............................................................................ 2-3
Operator/technician qualifications and basic responsibilities ................................... 2-4
Operator/owner responsibility ............................................................................ 2-4
Repair person qualifications .............................................................................. 2-4
Safety instructions regarding operation ................................................................... 2-4
Preparing for use ............................................................................................... 2-4
Startup and shutdown ........................................................................................ 2-4
Job site awareness ............................................................................................ 2-5
Danger zone awareness .................................................................................... 2-5
Machine operation ............................................................................................. 2-5
Carrying passengers ......................................................................................... 2-6
Mechanical integrity ........................................................................................... 2-6
Traveling ............................................................................................................ 2-6
Applications with lifting gear .................................................................................... 2-7
General instructions ........................................................................................... 2-7
Safety criteria ..................................................................................................... 2-7
Conditions for safe operation ............................................................................. 2-7
Trailers and attachments ......................................................................................... 2-8
General information regarding attachments ...................................................... 2-8
Installation notes ................................................................................................ 2-8
Transporting and towing .......................................................................................... 2-9
Towing ............................................................................................................... 2-9
BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm I-1

Table of Contents
Transportation .................................................................................................... 2-9

Safety instructions for maintenance ......................................................................... 2-9
General information on maintenance ................................................................. 2-9
Personal safety measures ............................................................................... 2-10
Preparing for maintenance and repair work ..................................................... 2-10
Performing maintenance and repairs ............................................................... 2-11
Special hazards ..................................................................................................... 2-11
Battery ............................................................................................................. 2-11
Tires ................................................................................................................. 2-11
Electrical energy .............................................................................................. 2-12
Hydraulic system ............................................................................................. 2-12
Noise ................................................................................................................ 2-12
Safety data sheet ............................................................................................. 2-12
Safety instructions for internal combustion engines ............................................... 2-13
Running engine ................................................................................................ 2-13
Fueling the engine ........................................................................................... 2-13
Operation 3
Description of control elements ................................................................................ 3-1
Cabin overview ........................................................................................................ 3-2
Instrument panel, multifunctional lever and drive lever (overview) .......................... 3-4
Drive lever (overview) .............................................................................................. 3-5
Indicator lights and warning lights: description ........................................................ 3-6
Indicator light check ........................................................................................... 3-6
Indicator lights and warning lights: description ........................................................ 3-6
Putting into operation for the first time ..................................................................... 3-9
Safety instructions ............................................................................................. 3-9
Important information ......................................................................................... 3-9
Running-in period .............................................................................................. 3-9
Check lists .............................................................................................................. 3-10
Start-up checklist ............................................................................................. 3-10
Operation checklist .......................................................................................... 3-11
“Parking” checklist ........................................................................................... 3-11
Cabin ...................................................................................................................... 3-12
Safety instructions regarding cabin entrance and exit ..................................... 3-12
Locking/unlocking the door .............................................................................. 3-12
Releasing and securing an open door with the door arrester .......................... 3-13
Locking and unlocking the cabin window on the right ...................................... 3-14
Opening the side window ................................................................................. 3-14
Fully opening the side window ......................................................................... 3-14
Locking the open side window ......................................................................... 3-15
Unlocking the open side window ..................................................................... 3-15
Side window emergency exit ................................................................................. 3-15
Seat ........................................................................................................................ 3-16
Seat adjustment (overview) ............................................................................. 3-16
Weight adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-16
Height adjustment ............................................................................................ 3-17
Backrest adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-17
Horizontal adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-17
Armrest adjustment .......................................................................................... 3-17
Seat belt (lap belt) .................................................................................................. 3-18
Specific information on the seat belt ................................................................ 3-18
Fastening the seat belt .................................................................................... 3-19
Unfastening the seat belt ................................................................................. 3-19
Longer/shorter lap belt adjustment .................................................................. 3-19
Opening/closing the engine cover .......................................................................... 3-20
Battery master switch (option) ............................................................................... 3-20
I-2 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm

Table of Contents
Interrupting power supply ................................................................................ 3-20

Switching on power supply .............................................................................. 3-20
Protective screens for front window and/or main lights (option) ............................ 3-20
Removing the protective screens for machine travel on public roads ............. 3-20
Location of fire extinguisher (option) ...................................................................... 3-20
Key-based drive interlock (option) ......................................................................... 3-21
Key-based drive interlock: scope of delivery ................................................... 3-21
Coding (“training”) new starting keys ............................................................... 3-21
Enabling (locking) the drive interlock ............................................................... 3-22
Disabling (releasing) the drive interlock ........................................................... 3-22
Deleting coded keys ........................................................................................ 3-22
Safety functions ............................................................................................... 3-23
Drive interlock with code input (option) .................................................................. 3-24
Keypad for entering codes (overview) ............................................................. 3-24
Entering/changing the personal code .............................................................. 3-25
Enabling the drive interlock ............................................................................. 3-25
Disabling the drive interlock ............................................................................. 3-26
Putting the drive interlock out of operation ...................................................... 3-27
Putting the drive interlock back into operation again ....................................... 3-27
Interruption of drive interlock power ................................................................ 3-27
Drive interlock maintenance ............................................................................ 3-27
Oil and fuel preheater (option) ............................................................................... 3-28
Oil preheater operation .................................................................................... 3-28
Fuel preheater operation ................................................................................. 3-28
Putting the diesel engine into operation ................................................................. 3-29
Notices on preparing to start the engine .......................................................... 3-29
Preparing to start the engine ........................................................................... 3-30
Notices on starting the engine ......................................................................... 3-30
Starting the engine .......................................................................................... 3-31
Avoiding running the engine under low-load conditions .................................. 3-32
Stopping the engine ............................................................................................... 3-32
Jump-starting the engine (external battery) ........................................................... 3-33
Safety instructions regarding external starting aids ......................................... 3-33
Providing external starting aid ......................................................................... 3-34
Jump-starting the engine (external battery) ........................................................... 3-35
Safety instructions regarding external starting aids ......................................... 3-35
Providing external starting aid ......................................................................... 3-35
Before machine operation ...................................................................................... 3-36
Special instructions for machine travel on public roads ................................... 3-36
Transport position of standard bucket on public roads .................................... 3-37
Functional check of all control elements .......................................................... 3-38
Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd control circuit
(standard) ........................................................................................................ 3-39
Lock for loader unit control lever and electrical locking of 3rd control circuit lever
(option) ............................................................................................................ 3-40
Steering system ..................................................................................................... 3-41
Wheel synchronization .................................................................................... 3-42
Differential lock ...................................................................................................... 3-42
Switching the differential lock ON and OFF ..................................................... 3-42
Accelerator pedal ................................................................................................... 3-42
Speed control with the accelerator pedal ........................................................ 3-42
Manual throttle (option) .......................................................................................... 3-43
Engine speed regulation with manual throttle .................................................. 3-43
Low-speed control (option) .................................................................................... 3-44
Setting the travel speed with the low-speed control ........................................ 3-44
Brake/inching pedal ............................................................................................... 3-45
Specific information on brake/inching pedal operation .................................... 3-45

Table of Contents
Braking with the brake/inching pedal ............................................................... 3-46

Inching with the brake/inching pedal ................................................................ 3-46
Parking brake ......................................................................................................... 3-47
General instructions regarding the parking brake ............................................ 3-47
Applying the parking brake .............................................................................. 3-47
Starting machine travel .......................................................................................... 3-48
Important information on starting machine travel ............................................. 3-48
Selecting a speed range and starting machine travel ...................................... 3-49
Changing direction (forward/reverse) .............................................................. 3-50
Putting the machine out of operation ..................................................................... 3-51
Stopping/parking the machine ......................................................................... 3-51
Load stabilizer (option) ........................................................................................... 3-52
General instructions regarding the load stabilizer function .............................. 3-52
Switching the load stabilizer ON and OFF ....................................................... 3-53
Backup warning system (option) ............................................................................ 3-54
Backup warning system feature ....................................................................... 3-54
Electric connection – front socket (option) ............................................................. 3-54
Machine lights ........................................................................................................ 3-55
Machine lights operation .................................................................................. 3-55
Working lights operation .................................................................................. 3-56
Interior light operation ...................................................................................... 3-56
Signaling system .................................................................................................... 3-57
Turn indicator operation ................................................................................... 3-57
Hazard warning system operation ................................................................... 3-57
Rotating beacon (option) ........................................................................................ 3-58
Rotating beacon operation ............................................................................... 3-58
Cabin heating and ventilation ................................................................................. 3-59
Heating and ventilation system operation ........................................................ 3-59
Air conditioning (option) ......................................................................................... 3-60
Air conditioning operation ................................................................................ 3-60
Washer system ...................................................................................................... 3-61
Wiper controls .................................................................................................. 3-61
Washer system reservoir ................................................................................. 3-61
Safe load indicator for telescopic boom ................................................................. 3-62
Safety instructions regarding the safe load indicator ....................................... 3-62
Safe load indicator display unit (overview) ...................................................... 3-63
Functional check of the safe load indicator ...................................................... 3-63
Overview of loader unit control lever (standard) .................................................... 3-64
Control lever for the lift, tilt and push-out cylinders (standard) ........................ 3-64
Overview of loader unit control lever (option) ........................................................ 3-65
Control lever for the lift, tilt and push-out cylinders (option) ............................. 3-65
Operating and locking the 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard) .................... 3-66
Unlocking the control lever (standard) ............................................................. 3-66
Unlocking and locking attachments (standard) ................................................ 3-66
Operation of hydraulic attachments (standard) ................................................ 3-66
Operating and locking the 3rd control circuit (electrical, option) ............................ 3-67
Unlocking the 3rd control circuit (electrical, option) ......................................... 3-67
Unlocking and locking attachments (option) .................................................... 3-67
Operation of hydraulic attachments (option) .................................................... 3-67
Continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard) ....................... 3-68
Continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option) ............................... 3-69
Emergency lowering of loader unit in case of diesel engine breakdown ............... 3-70
Lowering or raising .......................................................................................... 3-70
Pressure relief on the quick couplers and the quickhitch ....................................... 3-71
“plus powerflow” operation (switchable pressure relief valve) (option) .................. 3-72
Operating the telescopic boom .............................................................................. 3-73
Raising/extending the telescopic boom ........................................................... 3-73

Table of Contents
Retracting/lowering the telescopic boom ......................................................... 3-74

Equipping the machine with a standard bucket ..................................................... 3-75
Fields of application of the standard bucket .................................................... 3-75
Checking the mounting bore of the attachment ............................................... 3-75
Removing the transport hooks ......................................................................... 3-75
Picking up a standard bucket with mechanical locking (standard) .................. 3-76
Setting down a standard bucket with mechanical locking (standard) .............. 3-77
Installing a standard bucket with electric locking (option) ................................ 3-78
Removing a standard bucket with electric unlocking (option) .......................... 3-79
Working with the standard bucket .......................................................................... 3-80
General safety instructions for working with the bucket .................................. 3-80
Transport position of standard bucket in work operation ................................. 3-81
Safety instructions regarding work with a full standard bucket ........................ 3-82
Practical recommendations for digging ........................................................... 3-83
Loading loose material .................................................................................... 3-84
Loading if the material is hard to penetrate ..................................................... 3-85
Removing material/digging in soft soil ............................................................. 3-86
Removing material/digging in hard soil ............................................................ 3-87
Loading heaped material (non-compacted material) ....................................... 3-87
Loading heaped material (compacted material) .............................................. 3-88
Grading ............................................................................................................ 3-88
Practical recommendations for loading vehicles ............................................. 3-88
Freeing the machine ........................................................................................ 3-88
Fitting a multipurpose bucket ................................................................................. 3-89
Fields of application for multipurpose bucket .................................................. 3-89
Checking the mounting bore of the attachment ............................................... 3-89
Removing the transport hooks ......................................................................... 3-89
Picking up a multipurpose bucket with the quickhitch ..................................... 3-90
Hydraulic connections on the multipurpose bucket ......................................... 3-90
Connecting hydraulic lines to the machine ...................................................... 3-91
Checking the function of the multipurpose bucket (mechanical, standard) ..... 3-92
Checking the function of the multipurpose bucket (electrical, option) ............. 3-92
Removing the multipurpose bucket from the quickhitch .................................. 3-93
Working with the multipurpose bucket ................................................................... 3-94
General safety instructions for working with the multipurpose bucket ............. 3-94
Driving on public roads with the multipurpose bucket ..................................... 3-95
Transport position of multipurpose bucket ....................................................... 3-96
Safety instructions regarding work with a full multipurpose bucket ................. 3-97
Practical recommendations for digging ........................................................... 3-98
Grading and scraping ...................................................................................... 3-98
Stripping in thin layers (scraper) ...................................................................... 3-99
Spreading material in thin layers ..................................................................... 3-99
Pulling out material from slopes ...................................................................... 3-99
Moving material with longer reach ................................................................. 3-100
Picking up remaining material ....................................................................... 3-100
Grabbing bulky material ................................................................................. 3-100
Grabbing large objects .................................................................................. 3-101
Pulling out and setting posts .......................................................................... 3-101
Precise unloading .......................................................................................... 3-101
Backfilling round gravel into drainage ditches ............................................... 3-102
Unloading from the bottom of the bucket for increased tilt-out heights ......... 3-102
Fitting pallet forks ................................................................................................. 3-103
Fields of application for pallet forks ............................................................... 3-103
Checking the mounting bore of the attachment ............................................. 3-103
Fitting an attachment onto the quickhitch ...................................................... 3-104
Removing the pallet forks from the quickhitch ............................................... 3-104
Machine travel on public roads ...................................................................... 3-105

Table of Contents
Working with the pallet forks ................................................................................ 3-106

General safety instructions regarding the pallet forks .................................... 3-106
Brief instructions for fork arms ....................................................................... 3-108
Pallet forks load diagram ............................................................................... 3-109
Adjusting the fork arms .................................................................................. 3-110
Safety instructions regarding work with pallet forks loaded with material ...... 3-111
Picking up loads with the pallet forks ............................................................. 3-112
Approaching the material ............................................................................... 3-112
Loading material ............................................................................................ 3-113
Pallet forks transport position ........................................................................ 3-113
Transporting loads with the pallet forks ......................................................... 3-114
Setting down material with the pallet forks .................................................... 3-115
“Hose burst valve” safety feature ......................................................................... 3-116
Switching off the hose burst valve ................................................................. 3-116
Towing the machine ............................................................................................. 3-117
Safety instructions for towing away ............................................................... 3-117
Getting ready for towing ................................................................................. 3-117
Towing the machine ....................................................................................... 3-118
Once towing is over ....................................................................................... 3-118
Crane-lifting the machine ..................................................................................... 3-119
Safety instructions regarding crane-lifting ...................................................... 3-119
Crane-lifting the machine ............................................................................... 3-120
Loading and transporting the machine on a transportation vehicle ..................... 3-121
General safety instructions ............................................................................ 3-121
Loading and tying down the machine ............................................................ 3-122
Putting the machine out of operation for longer time ........................................... 3-124
Preserving the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders .................................... 3-124
Preserving the diesel engine ......................................................................... 3-124
Putting the machine out of operation permanently .............................................. 3-125
Notice on decommissioning ........................................................................... 3-125
Preparing disposal ......................................................................................... 3-125
Disposal ......................................................................................................... 3-125
Troubleshooting 4
Engine trouble .................................................................................................... 4-1
Maintenance 5
Notice on maintenance and service work ................................................................ 5-1
Maintenance personnel ..................................................................................... 5-1
Important information on maintenance .............................................................. 5-2
Safety prop for loader unit (option) .......................................................................... 5-3
Installing the safety prop .................................................................................... 5-3
Fuel system .............................................................................................................. 5-4
Safety instructions for refueling ......................................................................... 5-4
Diesel fuel specification ..................................................................................... 5-4
Stationary fuel pumps ........................................................................................ 5-5
Refueling ............................................................................................................ 5-5
Bleeding the fuel system .................................................................................... 5-6
Checking/cleaning the additional fuel filter (water separator, option) ................ 5-7
Engine lubrication system ........................................................................................ 5-8
Safety instructions regarding inspections and maintenance on the engine ....... 5-8
Checking the oil level once a day ...................................................................... 5-8
Adding engine oil ............................................................................................... 5-9
Washer system reservoir ......................................................................................... 5-9
Refilling washer fluid .......................................................................................... 5-9
Engine and hydraulics cooling system ................................................................... 5-10
Safety instructions regarding cooling system maintenance ............................. 5-10
Temperature indicator: diesel engine coolant .................................................. 5-12

Table of Contents
Checking the coolant level ............................................................................... 5-13

Adding coolant ................................................................................................. 5-14
Cleaning the radiator fins of the oil/water radiator ........................................... 5-15
Air filter ................................................................................................................... 5-16
Checking the air filter for dirt ............................................................................ 5-16
Replacing the air filter cartridge ....................................................................... 5-17
V-belt ..................................................................................................................... 5-18
Checking V-belt tension ................................................................................... 5-18
Retightening the V-belt .................................................................................... 5-19
Hydraulic system ................................................................................................... 5-20
Specific safety instructions regarding the hydraulic system ............................ 5-20
Instructions for preparing maintenance of the hydraulic system ..................... 5-21
Monitoring the hydraulic oil return filter ............................................................ 5-22
Checking the hydraulic oil level ....................................................................... 5-23
Adding hydraulic oil ......................................................................................... 5-24
Important information on the use of biodegradable oil .................................... 5-25
Checking hydraulic pressure lines ......................................................................... 5-26
Safety instructions regarding pressure line checks ......................................... 5-26
Lubrication work ..................................................................................................... 5-27
Lubricating the rear axle oscillation-type bearing ............................................ 5-27
Lubricating the front and rear axle planetary drive bearings ........................... 5-27
Lubrication work on the telescopic boom ............................................................... 5-28
Preparations for lubrication and spraying ........................................................ 5-28
Spraying oil onto the slide plates after a salt application (spray lance) ........... 5-29
Lubricating the telescopic boom ...................................................................... 5-30
Checking the wear pads .................................................................................. 5-30
Lubricating with the central lubrication system (option) ......................................... 5-31
General functional description of the central lubrication system ..................... 5-31
Time control ..................................................................................................... 5-31
Repair work ..................................................................................................... 5-31
Setting the lubrication and break times ........................................................... 5-32
Filling the central lubrication system ................................................................ 5-32
Maintenance of the braking system ....................................................................... 5-33
Safety instructions regarding the brake system ............................................... 5-33
Checking/adding brake fluid ............................................................................ 5-33
Tires ....................................................................................................................... 5-34
Daily tire checks .............................................................................................. 5-34
Safety instructions regarding wheel change .................................................... 5-35
Wheel change .................................................................................................. 5-36
Heating and ventilation system maintenance ........................................................ 5-37
General notice on the heating system ............................................................. 5-37
Cleaning the dust filter of the heating system .................................................. 5-37
Air conditioning (option): maintenance .................................................................. 5-38
Safety instructions regarding the air conditioning ............................................ 5-38
Daily functional and visual checks of the air conditioning ................................ 5-39
Electrical system .................................................................................................... 5-41
Safety instructions regarding the electrical system ......................................... 5-41
Checking/replacing the battery ........................................................................ 5-43
Servicing and maintenance at regular intervals ............................................... 5-45
Inspection and maintenance on the electrical system at regular intervals ...... 5-46
Checking the alternator ................................................................................... 5-46
Alternator ......................................................................................................... 5-46
Checking/replacing fuses ................................................................................ 5-47
Checking/replacing relays ............................................................................... 5-48
Checking/replacing fuses of the main fuse box ............................................... 5-48
General cleaning and maintenance ....................................................................... 5-49
Safety instructions regarding cleaning work .................................................... 5-49

Table of Contents
Cleaning inside the cabin ................................................................................. 5-50

Cleaning the pedals ......................................................................................... 5-50
Cleaning the door locks and arresters ............................................................. 5-51
Cleaning the seat belt ...................................................................................... 5-51
Cleaning the exterior of the machine ............................................................... 5-52
Cleaning the engine compartment ................................................................... 5-53
Checking the threaded fittings ......................................................................... 5-53
Checking pivots and hinges ............................................................................. 5-53
Maintenance and servicing of the attachments ...................................................... 5-54
Maintenance “Aggressive Media” (option) ............................................................. 5-55
Important information on anticorrosion protection ........................................... 5-55
Components coated with anticorrosive wax .................................................... 5-55
Measures for maintaining anticorrosive protection .......................................... 5-56
Cleaning ........................................................................................................... 5-56
Applying the protective anticorrosion coating .................................................. 5-57
Treatment of oxidized surfaces ........................................................................ 5-57
Fluids and lubricants ............................................................................................. 5-59
Explanation of symbols on the maintenance label ................................................. 5-60
Maintenance label .................................................................................................. 5-61
Maintenance plan ................................................................................................... 5-62
Important information on the maintenance plan .............................................. 5-62
Maintenance plan overview ............................................................................. 5-62
Technical data 6
Model designations and trade names (overview) .................................................... 6-1
Frame ....................................................................................................................... 6-1
Engine ...................................................................................................................... 6-1
Drive ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Variable displacement pump ............................................................................. 6-2
Boost pump ........................................................................................................ 6-2
Variable displacement motor ............................................................................. 6-2
Axles ........................................................................................................................ 6-3
Front axle ........................................................................................................... 6-3
Rear axle ........................................................................................................... 6-3
Brakes ...................................................................................................................... 6-4
Service brake ..................................................................................................... 6-4
Parking brake ..................................................................................................... 6-4
Steering system ....................................................................................................... 6-4
Operating hydraulics ................................................................................................ 6-5
Hydraulic pump, control valve, lift and tilt cylinders ........................................... 6-5
Electrical system ...................................................................................................... 6-6
Electric units ...................................................................................................... 6-6
Fuse box ............................................................................................................ 6-6
Main fuse box with relays .................................................................................. 6-7
Switching relays ................................................................................................. 6-7
Tires ......................................................................................................................... 6-8
Weights .................................................................................................................... 6-8
Noise levels .............................................................................................................. 6-9
Vibration ................................................................................................................... 6-9
Coolant compound table .......................................................................................... 6-9
Tightening torques ................................................................................................. 6-10
General tightening torques .............................................................................. 6-10
Specific tightening torques ............................................................................... 6-10
Conversion table (DIN standard – USA standard) ........................................... 6-11
Payloads ................................................................................................................ 6-12
Telescopic boom with bucket ........................................................................... 6-12
Telescopic boom with pallet forks .................................................................... 6-12

Table of Contents
Dimensions with bucket ........................................................................................ 6-13

Dimensions with pallet forks ................................................................................. 6-14
Index S-1

Table of Contents

Introduction
Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Information on this Operator’s Manual
The storage bin at the rear of the operator seat contains the Operator’s Manual.
This Operator’s Manual contains important information on how to work safely, correctly
and economically with the machine. Therefore, it aims not only at new operators, but it also
serves as a reference for experienced ones. It helps to avoid hazardous situations and
reduce repair costs and downtimes. Furthermore, the reliability and the service life of the
machine will be increased by following the instructions in the Operator’s Manual. This is
why the Operator’s Manual must always be kept at hand on the machine.
Your own safety, as well as the safety of others, depends to a great extent on how the
machine is moved and operated. Therefore, carefully read and understand this Operator’s
Manual prior to the first drive. The Operator’s Manual will help to familiarize yourself more
easily with the machine, thereby enabling you to use it more safely and efficiently.
Before using the machine for the first time, carefully read chapter “Safety Instructions”
as well, in order to be prepared for possible dangerous situations. As a rule, keep the
following in mind:
Careful and prudent working is the best way to avoid accidents!
Operational safety and readiness of the machine do not only depend on your skill, but
also on maintenance and servicing of the machine. This is why regular maintenance and
service work is absolutely necessary. Extensive maintenance and repair work must always
be performed by a technician with appropriate training. Insist on using original spare parts
for repairs. This ensures operational safety and readiness of your machine, and maintains
its value.
Your Wacker Neuson dealer will be pleased to answer any further questions regarding the
machine or the Operator’s Manual.
Abbreviations/symbols
☞ This symbol requires you to perform the activity described
☞ Subdivision within lists or an activity. Follow the steps in the recommended order
• This symbol stands for a list
• Subdivision within lists or an activity. Follow the steps in the recommended order
➥ Description of the effects or results of an activity
“Option” = optional equipment
Stated whenever controls or other components of the machine are installed as an option.
Travel direction in drawings or figures.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-1

Introduction
1.2 Machine overview
1 2 3 4
5
20
6
11
10
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
Fig. 1: Machine outside views
Pos. Designation Pos. Designation

Service flap 12 Headlight with turn indicator
1
(fuses, relays, fresh air filter)
13 Loader unit prop (in the access) (option)
2 Rearview mirror
14 Storage box (in the access) (option)
3 Lifting eye1 (for removing the cabin)
15 Access
Front working lights (option),
16 Wheel chock
4 rear working lights
(standard on the left/option on the right) 17 Front eye hook for loading/tying down the machine
5 Turn indicator/brake/rear lights 18 Lift cylinder
6 Door arrester 19 Telescopic boom
7 Towing gear 20 Push-out cylinder
8 Reflectors 1. Eye hooks are for removing the cabin only, and may not be used for crane-lifting the
machine
9 Rear eye hook for loading/tying down the machine
10 Door handle
11 Handhold
1-2 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Introduction
1.3 Models and trade names (overview)

Wheel loader model Trade name
346-11 750 T
1.4 Brief description of the wheel loader

The wheel loader is a self-propelled work machine according to the description in the ISO
6165 standard for wheel loaders.
Get informed on and follow the legal regulations of your country.
This machine is a versatile and powerful tool for moving earth, gravel and debris on con-
struction sites and elsewhere. The wide range of attachments accounts for the numerous
applications of the machine: as a fork lift, a snow plow, a spreader for grit, salt etc., a
sweeper or a tree replanter. See chapter Fields of application and using the wheel loader
with an attachment on page 1-5 for further applications. Retrofit the machine with appropri-
ate safety features when using it in lifting gear operation (see section “Applications with lift-
ing gear” in chapter Safety Instructions).
Main components of machine

• ROPS/FOPS tested cabin, closed version
check number: FOPS ISO 3449 (cabin with protective screen)
➥ ROPS is the abbreviation for “Roll Over Protective Structure”
➥ FOPS is the abbreviation for “Falling Object Protective Structure”
• Water-cooled Deutz four-cylinder in-line engine, exhaust emissions according to EC
standard 2004/26 EC
• Sturdy steel sheet chassis, rubber-mounted engine
• Automotive drive, infinitely variable hydrostatic axial-piston gearbox; maximum speed
20 kph (30 kph option) /12.43 mph (18.64 mph option)
• Hydraulic four-wheel power steering with emergency steering features
• Front and rear planetary steering axles, rear axle with oscillation
• Service brake (mechanical and hydrostatic), mechanical disc-type parking brake
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-3

Introduction
Hydrostatic drive
The diesel engine permanently drives a hydraulic pump (variable displacement pump),
the oil flow of which is sent to a hydraulic motor flanged on the gearbox. The force of the
hydraulic motor is transmitted to the rear axle via the transfer gearbox. At the same time,
the front axle is driven by the cardan shaft, ensuring permanent 4 wheel drive.
Operating hydraulics and 4 wheel steering

The diesel engine also drives the joint gear pump for the operating hydraulics and the
hydrostatic 4 wheel steering. The oil flow of this pump depends on the diesel engine
speed only.
When the machine is in operation, the entire diesel engine output can be transmitted to the
gear pump for the operating hydraulics and steering. This is made possible by a so-called
inching valve that responds as soon as the service brake is used, reducing or cutting off
power input of the drive. Therefore, engine output is fully available for the telescopic boom
by pressing the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at the same time.
Cooling system
A combined oil/water radiator (for the diesel engine and the hydraulic oil) is located at the
rear of the machine.
The indicator lights on the instrument panel of the machine ensure constant monitoring of
the engine and hydraulic oil temperature.
1-4 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Introduction
1.5 Fields of application and using the wheel loader with an attachment
The attachments will decide in the first place how the machine is used.
Note that not all attachments listed in the table are allowed to be used on public roads.
The attachments complying with German road traffic regulations and the applicable
provisions are listed in the General Certification for Vehicles (Germany) or the Data
Confirmation (Germany)!
Attachments without ABE (General Certification for Vehicles) require an EBE
(separate certification for vehicles) made out by the competent authority!
Caution
Only the attachments specified below are certified for use with this wheel
loader. In order minimize the risk of damage to the equipment and of
insecure operating behavior:
☞ Only use approved attachments.
Attachments with certified material densities

Possible equipment and certified material densities.
Tele- ISO 7546

Part no.
Description of attachment scopic Dimensions capacity Use
(model)
loaders struck/heaped
1750 mm (68.89 in)
1000102344 with teeth
1000102345 1750 mm (68.89 in) Loosening, picking up, transporting
Standard bucket – 3 and loading loose or solid material
without teeth 0.5/0.6 m
346-11
normal material1 30/36 in³ (material density  p = 1.8 t/m³)
1750 mm (68.89 in) (material density  p = 64.94 lb/in³)
1000160648 without teeth,
with screwed-on blade
Picking up, transporting and loading
Standard bucket – 1850 mm (72.83 in) 0.64/0.76 m3 very lightweight material
346-11 1000096389
lightweight material 1, 2 without teeth 39/46 in³ (material density  p = 1.3 t/m³)
(material density  p = 46.90 lb/in³)
Picking up, transporting and loading

Standard bucket – 2150 mm (84.64 in) 0.9/1.0 m3 very lightweight material
346-11 1000096394
superlightweight material1, 2 without teeth 55/61 in³ (material density  p = 0.9 t/m³)
Grading, removing and scraping

vegetation, for example; picking
1750 mm (68.89 in)
up and evenly spreading material;
1, 3 1000113244 with teeth 0.49/0.58 m3
Multipurpose bucket 346-11 grabbing bulky material; loading
1000113492 1750 mm (68.89 in) 30/35 in³
trucks
without teeth
(material density  p = 1.8 t/m³)
(material density p = 64.94 lb/in³)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-5

Introduction
Tele- ISO 7546

Part no.
Description of attachment scopic Dimensions capacity Use
(model)
loaders struck/heaped
Picking up and transporting bulky
Heavy duty bucket 0.5/0.6 m3 recycling material, for example
346-11 1000111090 1850 mm (72.83 in)
with hydraulic clamp3, 4 30/36 in³ (material density  p = 1.3 t/m³)
1000101820 1000 mm (39.37 in)

Pallet forks3, 4, 5 346-11 - Picking up and transporting pallets
1000101822 1200 mm (47.24 in)
Material pusher3, 4 346-11 1000050660 3000 mm (118.11 in) - For moving loose bulk material
800 – 1800 mm Picking up and transporting round

Hydraulic round bale clamp3, 4 346-11 1000177701 -
(31.49 – 70.86 in) bales
Picking up and transporting

Manure forks with grab3, 4 346-11 1000142978 1800 mm (70.86 in) - for example grass, manure,
brushwood and straw
Digging and transporting nursery

Tree replanter3, 4 346-11 1000100840 - -
trees
Scarifying dense soil, loosening

Front scarifier3, 4 346-11 1000100841 - -
humus soil
Rotary broom2, 3, 4, 6 346-11 1000139717 - - Cleaning roads and facilities
Snow plow2, 3, 4, 6 346-11 1000142915 - - Winter service
For repair, assembly, disassembly,

Work platform3, 4, 7 346-11 1000109953 - - maintenance and inspection work
above ground
1. Bucket must be hitched onto the hooks on the inside of the bucket when driving on public roads
Order no. 1000105235 (transport hook on the left) 1000105234 (transport hook on the right)
2. Only in connection with additional lights order no. 1000105002 and mounting kit order no. 1000137629 during machine travel on public roads
3. See the Operator’s Manual of the attachment for putting the attachment into operation and using it
4. Not authorized for use on public roads
5. Only in connection with load diagram
6. Authorized for use on public roads only with EBE (separate certification for operation, Federal Republic of Germany)
7. Only in connection with equipment no. 1000169673
See “Merkblatt für Anbaugeräte” (leaflet with specific instructions for attachments) § 30 clauses 10/11/12 of the StVZO German road traffic regulations for information on installing attachments
1-6 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Introduction
1.6 Type labels and component numbers

Serial number and type label
The serial number is stamped on the machine frame A (next to the cabin attachment,
A on the right in travel direction). It is also located on the type label on the machine frame
at the front right (on the side of the loader unit bulkhead).
Fig. 2 : Serial number
The type label is located on the machine frame, at the front right in travel direction
(on one side of the loader unit bulkhead).
The CE mark on the type label means that the machine meets the requirements of the
Machine Directive (2006/42 EC) and that the conformity procedure has been performed.
The CE mark is valid only in countries where the EU machine guideline (2006/42 EC)
is applied!
1 Front gross axle weight rating (kg) 4000
2 Rear gross axle weight rating (kg) 4000
3 – –
4 Year of construction 2013
Other information – see chapter 6 “Technical data” on page 6-1
Fig. 3 : Type label
Cabin registration number

The cabin registration number (arrow, fig. 3) is located in the cabin, at the upper right in
travel direction.
Fig. 4 : Cabin registration number
Engine serial number

The serial number (arrow, fig. 4) is located on the cylinder-head cover (engine).
Example: Deutz D2011 L04 W
Fig. 5 : Diesel engine serial number
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-7

Introduction
Serial number of hydraulic pump

The type label (arrow) is located on the hydraulic pump housing (next to where the pump is
installed on the diesel engine)
Fig. 6 : Serial number of hydraulic pump
Serial number of hydraulic motor

The type label (arrow) is located on the hydraulic motor (rear axle), on the right in travel
direction.
Fig. 7 : Serial number of hydraulic motor
Serial number of rear axle

The serial number (arrow, fig. 7) is located on the upper side of the differential housing,
at the rear.
Fig. 8 : Serial number of rear axle and gearbox
Serial number of front axle

The serial number (arrow, fig. 8) is located on the upper side of the differential housing,
at the front.
Fig. 9 : Serial number of front axle
1-8 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Introduction
1.7 Labels (overview)
XX
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-9

Introduction
1.8 Signs and symbols

Labels on the outside of the machine
Label: Cabin eye hooks
The eye hooks on the cabin are for removing the cabin only and may not be used for
crane-lifting the machine.
Other information – see chapter 3 “Crane-lifting the machine” on page 3-120
Location
At the top of the cabin (4x)
Fig. 10 : Eye hook label
Slinging points for tying down the machine

Points for tying down the machine.
The eye hooks are used for tying down the machine during loading and transport.
Other information
– see chapter 3 “Loading and tying down the machine” on page 3-122
Location
Fig. 11 : Label for tying down the machine
On the left and right of the machine frame above the front axle attachment,
and at the rear underneath the engine
Noise level label
Noise levels produced by the machine.
LWa = sound power level
Other information – see chapter 6 “Noise levels” on page 6-9
XX Location
Rear window
Fig. 12 : Safety alert symbol
Description
This label alerts persons standing or working near the machine to an existing
safety hazard within the area around the machine. Stay clear of the machine!
Location
On the loader unit on the left and right, and at the rear on the engine cover.
Fig. 13 : Keep distance
Label: Fuel filler opening

Location:
On the left on the cabin above the filler opening of the fuel tank.
Fig. 14 : Label: Fuel filler opening
1-10 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Introduction
Labels inside the cabin

Load diagram for pallet forks and tire pressure table
...when using pallet forks with fork arms:
The numbers shown in the shaded range indicate the maximum authorized load
on the fork arms for industrial and off-road applications respectively.
The maximum load varies according to the distance from the load center.
Example:
➥ – see chapter 3 “Pallet forks load diagram” on page 3-109
Tire pressure table
...list of approved tires with prescribed tire pressures
➥ – see chapter 6 “Tires” on page 6-8
Location
Inside the cabin, on left side of front window
Fig. 15 : Load diagram
IMPORTANT
The load diagram is valid only for applications with pallet forks.
• – see Attachments on page 1-5
• Observe the specific load diagrams of other attachments used,
for example rotary crane jib!
Brake fluid label

A = Caution. Do not add any water.
A
B = Use only LHM brake fluids.
➥ – see chapter 5 “Maintenance of the braking system” on page 5-33
B
➥ – see chapter 5 “Fluids and lubricants” on page 5-59
Location
Fig. 16 : Brake fluid label
On the brake-fluid reservoir
Label for control lever operation (3rd control circuit) (option), mechanical locking
• A = travel direction operation: (F) forward/(R) reverse and (N) neutral position
C D
• B = extend/retract the telescopic boom
A • C = control lever (joystick) unlocked/locked for road travel
E
• D = control lever (3rd control circuit for attachments) unlocked/locked
F • E = telescopic boom operation: raise, lower, tilt in/out
B • F = 3rd control circuit operation. Pick up/set down attachment
• G = telescopic boom operation: raise, lower with float position, dump in/out
C D Location
On the lower right on the side window
A
G
F
B
Fig. 17 : Label: control lever operation (overview)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-11

Introduction
Label for control lever operation (3rd control circuit) (option), electrical locking
C • A = travel direction: (F) forward/(R) reverse and (N) neutral position
E • B = extend/retract the telescopic boom
A • C = mechanical locking of control lever (joystick)
• D = electrical locking/unlocking of 3rd control circuit: attachments on quickhitch
B and hydraulic control circuit for attachment
• E = loader unit operation: raise, lower, tilt in/out
• F = 3rd control circuit operation. Pick up/set down attachment
• G = loader unit operation: raise, lower with float position (option), tilt in/out
E Location
On the lower right on the side window
Fig. 19 : Label: control lever operation (overview)
Operator’s Manual label
WARNING
Read and understand the Operator's Manual before starting up,
working, adjusting, servicing or repairing the machine.
Location
Inside the cabin on the right on the pillar
Seat belt label

• Operate the machine only from the operator seat.
• Fasten your seat belt before driving and operating the machine.
Location
On the pillar on the right inside the cabin
Label: Observe machine stability

• Ensure machine stability
• Do not overload the machine, only use released attachments and
operate the machine only on firm ground.
• Observe the instructions in the Operator’s Manual.
➥ – see chapter 3 “Seat belt (lap belt)” on page 3-18
Location
Fig. 20 : Seat, fastening the seat belt Inside the cabin on the right on the pillar
1-12 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Introduction
Label: Remove the starting key before opening the engine cover
Read and understand the Operator's Manual before starting up, working, adjusting,
servicing, or repairing the machine.
Remove the starting key!
Location
On the pillar on the right inside the cabin.
Fig. 21 : Read and understand the Operator’s Manual
Safety warning: No transportation of persons

Lifting or transporting persons in the bucket or on the pallet forks is prohibited.
Location:
In the cabin on the cover plate between the steering wheel and the front window.
Fig. 22 : Prohibitive label: Transportation of persons
. Safety alert label: Keep a safe distance from the machine

Indicates that persons other than the operator must keep a safe distance away from the
machine during operation. Stay clear of the machine!
Location:
In the cabin at the rear above the rear window.
Fig. 23 : Safety alert: safety distance to persons
Label: No other persons allowed in the cabin

Warning. Carrying or transporting accompanying persons in the cabin and on the wheel
loader is prohibited
Location
On the pillar on the left inside the cabin
Fig. 24 : Prohibitive label: No other persons allowed
Emergency exit label

– see chapter 3 “Safety instructions regarding cabin entrance and exit” on page 3-12
Location
On the window on the right inside the cabin
Fig. 26 : Emergency exit label
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-13

Introduction
Labels in the engine compartment

Label: Shearing hazard
Stop the engine before opening the engine cover.
Do not touch any moving or turning parts!
Location
On the right in the engine compartment, on the sheet-metal separation of the radiator.
Fig. 27 : Shearing hazard
Warning label: Hot fluid, reservoir is under pressure (coolant)

Burn hazard! Wear protective clothing before opening the reservoir.
Location:
On the right in the engine compartment near the coolant reservoir.
Fig. 28 : Label: Hot fluid (coolant)
Warning label: Hot surface of diesel engine muffler

Burn hazard! Persons are warned against possible safety hazards near the symbol.
Wear protective clothing when working on the muffler.
Location:
On the right in the engine compartment, on the radiator sheet-metal separation near
the muffler.
Fig. 29 : Label: Hot surface
Label: Filler opening for hydraulic oil

A = hydraulic oil
B = biodegradable hydraulic oil
– see chapter 5 “Important information on the use of biodegradable oil” on page 5-25
Location
A B On the rear wall of the engine compartment, on the left
(next to the filler inlet hydraulic oil reservoir)
Fig. 30 : Label: Filler opening for hydraulic oil
Label for biodegradable lubricants (option)
Biodegradable lubricants (biodegradable oil) are used on the machine
➥ – see chapter 5 “Important information on the use of biodegradable oil” on page 5-25
Location
Inside the cabin
1-14 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Safety instructions
Safety instructions
2 Safety instructions
2.1 Safety symbols in this manual
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used for warning you against potential personal risk
or danger.
• Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, results in death or
serious injury.
☞ Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid injury or death.
WARNING
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or

serious injury.
☞ Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.
Caution
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
☞ Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible minor or
moderate injury.
NOTICE: Used without the safety alert symbol. NOTICE indicates a situation which,
if not avoided, could cause damage to property.
Remark: Contains additional information important to a procedure.
Important
Identifies an instruction that, when followed, provides for a more efficient and
economical use of the machine.
Environment
Failure to observe the instructions identified by this symbol can cause damage
to the environment. The environment is in danger if environmentally hazardous
material (waste oil, for example) is not subject to proper use or disposal.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * Sicherheitshinweise.fm 2-1

Safety instructions
2.2 Designated use

1 In accordance with its designated use, the machine may be used ONLY for moving
earth, gravel, coarse gravel or ballast and rubble. It may also be used for working with
the attachments approved in the – see chapter 1 “Brief description of the wheel loader”
on page 1-3.
2 No other applications are designated for the use of the machine. Wacker Neuson will
not be liable for damage resulting from use other than mentioned above. The operator
alone will bear the risk.
3 “Designated use” also includes observing the instructions set forth in this Operator’s
Manual and observing the maintenance schedule.
4 Machine safety can be negatively affected by performing machine modifications without
proper authority and by using spare parts, equipment, attachments and optional
equipment which have not been checked and released by Wacker Neuson. Wacker
Neuson will not be liable for damage resulting from unapproved parts or unauthorized
modifications.
5 Wacker Neuson shall not be liable for injury and/or damage to property caused by
failure to observe the safety instructions on labels and in this Operator's Manual,
and by the negligence of the duty to exercise due care when:
• transporting the machine
• working with the machine
• servicing the machine and performing maintenance
• repairing the machine
This is also applicable when special attention has not been drawn to the duty to
exercise due care.
6 Read and understand this Operator's Manual before starting up, moving, operating,
servicing, or repairing the machine. Observe all safety instructions.
7 The machine shall NOT be used for transportation jobs on public roads!
2.3 General conduct and safety instructions

Conditions for use
• The machine has been designed and built in accordance with state-of-the-art
standards and the recognized safety regulations. Nevertheless, its use can constitute
a risk to the user or to third parties, or cause damage to the machine and to other
property.
• Read and follow this Operator's Manual and other manuals that accompany the
machine.
• The machine must only be used in accordance with its designated use and the
instructions set forth in this Operator's Manual.
• The machine must only be used by qualified operators who are fully aware of the risks
involved in operating the machine.
• Do not start, move, or operate a damaged or malfunctioning machine. Any mechanical
malfunctions, especially those affecting the safety of the machine, must be repaired
immediately. Only qualified technicians shall determine how to move a damaged or
malfunctioning machine to a safe place for diagnosis and repair.
• The operator/owner commits himself to operate and keep the machine in serviceable
condition and, if necessary or required by law, to require the operating or servicing
persons to wear protective clothing and safety equipment.
2-2 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * Sicherheitshinweise.fm

Safety instructions
Operator training and knowledge

• Always keep this Operator's Manual and other manuals that accompany the machine
in their storage compartment provided in the operator station on the machine.
Immediately replace an incomplete or illegible Operator's Manual.
• All persons working on or with the machine must read and understand the safety
information in this Operator's Manual before beginning work. This applies especially
to persons working only occasionally on the machine, such as performing set-up or
maintenance tasks.
• Follow, and instruct the operator in, legal and other mandatory regulations relevant to
accident prevention and environmental protection. These can include handling
hazardous substances, issuing and/or wearing personal protective equipment, or
obeying traffic regulations.
• The operator/owner must regularly ensure that all persons entrusted with operation
or maintenance of the machine are working in compliance with this Operator's Manual
and are aware of the risks and safety factors of the machine.
Preparing for use

• Before starting up the machine, ALWAYS inspect the machine to ensure that it is ready
for safe work and travel operation.
• Wear close-fitting work clothes that do not hinder movement. Tie back long hair and
remove all jewelry (including rings).
Modifications and spare parts

• NEVER make any modifications, additions, or conversions to the machine and its
superstructures (for example, cabin), or the machine's attachments, without the
approval of Wacker Neuson! Such modifications can affect safety and/or machine
performance. This also applies to the installation and the adjustment of safety
devices and valves, as well as to welding work on load-bearing elements.
• Spare parts must comply with the technical requirements specified by Wacker Neuson.
Contact your Wacker Neuson dealer for assistance.

Safety instructions
2.4 Operator/technician qualifications and basic responsibilities

Operator/owner responsibility
• Only allow trained and experienced individuals to drive, maintain or repair the machine.
NEVER let unauthorized or underaged persons operate the machine.
• Clearly and unequivocally define the individual responsibilities of the operator and
technician for operation, maintenance, and repair.
• Define the machine operator’s responsibilities on the job site and for observing traffic
regulations. Give the operator the authority to refuse instructions by third parties that
are contrary to safety.
• Do not allow persons to be trained or instructed by anyone other than an experienced
person. Also, NEVER allow persons taking part in a general training course to work on
or with the machine without being supervised by an experienced person.
Repair person qualifications

• Work on the electrical system and equipment, on the chassis, and the steering and
braking systems may be performed only by skilled individuals who have been specially
trained for such work.
• Work on the hydraulic system of the machine must be performed only by a technician
with special knowledge and experience in hydraulic equipment.
2.5 Safety instructions regarding operation

Preparing for use
• Keep the machine clean. This reduces the fire hazard (such as from combustible
materials like rags), and reduces the injury hazard or operational accidents that can
be caused by dirt build-up on the travel pedals or foot rests and steps.
• Observe all safety, warning, and informational signs and labels on the machine.
• Start and operate the machine from the operator seat only.
• The operator must sit in the seat, and fasten and adjust the seat belt before putting
the machine into operation.
• Adjust the seat position before starting work so that you are able to press the brake
pedal as far as it can go. Never change the seat position when traveling or working!
• Ensure that all safety devices are properly installed and functional before starting work.
• Before putting the machine/attachment into operation (startup/moving), ensure that no
one in the immediate vicinity will be at risk.
Startup and shutdown

• Perform startup and shutdown procedures according to this Operator's Manual.
• Observe all indicator lights.
• Do not use starting fluid (for example, ether) especially in those cases in which a
heater plug (intake air pre-heating) is used at the same time.
• Ensure that the brakes, steering, signaling, and light systems are functional before
operating the machine, and also before restarting after an interruption of work.
• Before leaving the operator seat, always secure the machine against unintentional
movement and unauthorized use.

Safety instructions
Job site awareness

• Before beginning work, familiarize yourself with the surroundings and
circumstances of the work site. Be aware of:
• Obstacles in the working and traveling area
• the soil weight-bearing capacity
• any necessary barriers separating the work site from public roads
• Always keep a safe distance from the edges of building pits and slopes.
• When working in buildings or in enclosed areas, look out for:
• Height of the ceiling/clearances
• Width of entrances
• Maximum load of ceilings and floors
• Sufficient room ventilation – risk of carbon monoxide poisoning!
• Observe the danger zone. See “Danger zone awareness”.
• Use the rearview mirror to stay aware of obstacles and personnel on the job site.
• Always switch on the work lights in conditions of poor visibility and after dark. However,
ensure that users of public roads will not be temporarily blinded by the work lights.
• Should the lights of the machine not be sufficient for performing work safely, provide
additional lighting of the job site.
Danger zone awareness

• The danger zone is the area in which persons risk injury due to the movements
of the machine, work equipment, additional equipment, or material.
• The danger zone also includes the area affected by falling material, equipment
or construction debris. The danger zone must be extended by 0.5 m (20”) in the
immediate vicinity of buildings, scaffolds, or other elements of construction.
• Seal off the danger zone should it not be possible to keep a safe distance.
Stop machine operation immediately if persons do not leave the danger zone
in spite of warnings!
Machine operation
• Never operate the machine if you are standing on the ground.
• Operate the machine ONLY when you are seated and you have fastened your seat
belt. Stop the engine before releasing the seat belt.
• During operation on slopes, drive or work uphill or downhill. If traveling across a
slope cannot be avoided, bear in mind the tilting limit of the machine. Always keep the
attachments/work equipment close to the ground. This also applies to downhill machine
travel. When traveling or working across a slope, the load must be on the uphill side of
the machine.
• On sloping terrain, adapt your travel speed to the prevailing ground conditions.
• Never get on or off a moving machine, and do not jump off the machine.
• Hydrostatic four wheel steering requires practice before a user becomes familiar
with the control response. Therefore, adjust the travel speed to your abilities and the
surroundings. Select and change the steering mode only when the machine is at a
standstill.

Safety instructions
Carrying passengers
• If a passenger accompanies the operator, he or she must sit on the designated
passenger seat to the left of the operator seat.
• Never install a man basket or a working platform to the machine.
Mechanical integrity
• Take the necessary precautions to ensure that the machine is used only when in
a safe and serviceable state.
• Operate the machine ONLY if all protective and safety-oriented devices
(ROPS, removable safety devices, soundproofing elements, mufflers, etc.)
are in place and fully functional.
• Check the machine before entering the cabin for visible damage and defects.
Report any changes, including changes in the machine's function and response,
to your supervisor immediately!
• If the machine is functioning unpredictably, stop the machine immediately, lock it,
and report the malfunction to a qualified technician or supervisor. Safety-relevant
damage or malfunctions of the machine must be rectified immediately.
Traveling
• When traveling on or in public areas, observe all applicable regulations.
Ensure beforehand that the machine is in compliance with these regulations.
• Installed work lights must NOT be used for travel.
• When crossing underpasses, gates, bridges and tunnels, or when passing under
overhead lines, ensure that the clearance height and width are sufficient to avoid
contact.
• Empty the bucket before traveling on public roads.

Safety instructions
2.6 Applications with lifting gear

General instructions
• Applications with lifting gear are understood as procedures involving raising,
transporting and lowering loads with the help of slings and load-securing devices
(ropes, chains, etc.). In doing so, the help of persons is necessary for securing
and detaching the load. This applies, for example, to lifting and lowering pipes,
shaft rings or containers.
• The machine may be used for applications with lifting gear ONLY if the prescribed
safety devices are in place and functional.
Safety criteria
• When used for craning applications, the machine must meet the following criteria:
• Proper equipment for slinging and securing the load
• Proper lift capacity per tables in this Operator's Manual
Conditions for safe operation

• Secure the load to prevent it from falling or slipping. Install an OSHA-approved load
hook after removing the bucket or other approved attachment to provide a secure
attachment point for the lifting sling, chain, or cable.
• Have loads fastened, and crane operators instructed, by a qualified person competent
in craning operation and standard hand signals. The person giving instructions to
the operator must be within sight of the operator during load attachment and load
disconnection.
• The load shall be kept as close to the surface as practical to accomplish the craning
operation. The operator shall gently move the controls and machine to avoid swing
or oscillating motion of the load. A tether line is recommended to dampen the tendency
of the load to swing or oscillate during the craning operation.
• Machine travel with a raised load must be done very carefully on a level surface,
moving very slowly to avoid sudden motion that can cause swinging or oscillating
motion of the load.
• The person(s) attaching the load to the machine shall approach the boom only from the
side, and only if the operator is in visual contact with them. No one shall approach the
machine or attempt to attach the load until the machine has stopped and the operator
has signaled for the attachment.

Safety instructions
2.7 Trailers and attachments

General information regarding attachments
• Prior to traveling, remove all attachments which cannot be secured in compliance
with the legal regulations of your locality.
• The machine operating characteristics, including steering, vary with different option
attachments and counterweights. The operator shall be familiar with the variations
and act accordingly.
• Use only approved attachments and connecting hardware.
• Attach and remove attachments carefully to avoid damage and potential injury.
• Confirm that the attachment has been properly and securely attached to the machine
according to the instructions. Before using the attachment, the operator shall confirm
that the attachment performs correctly in response to control actuation.
• Do not attach the attachment with the engine running and the machine moving.
• Trailer operation with the towing gear of the machine is not permitted!
• Before putting the machine/attachment into operation (startup/moving), ensure that
no one in the immediate vicinity will be at risk.
• Before leaving the operator seat, always secure the machine against unintentional
movement and unauthorized use. Lower the attachments to the ground.
Installation notes
• Couple and uncouple hydraulic hoses/lines (hydraulic quick couplers) only if the
engine is stopped and the controls actuated to release the hydraulic pressure
remaining in the circuit. Follow the operating instructions for releasing the pressure.
• Operate the machine only if all protective devices for the attachments have been
installed and are functional, and if all brake, light, and hydraulic connections have
been connected.
• If an optional attachment is installed, ensure that all lights and associated indicator
lamps are installed and functional.
• The lock pin of the quickhitch shall be visible at each end of the pin to confirm that
the attachment is securely locked in place. The operator shall perform a check
operation to confirm the latching integrity before operating at a production pace.
• Crushing and shearing hazard: Ensure that no one is between the attachment and the
machine while coupling attachments to the telescopic boom. Secure the machine and
attachments against unintentional movement.

Safety instructions
2.8 Transporting and towing

Towing
The machine must be towed, loaded and transported according to the procedures
described within this Operator's Manual
– see chapter 3 “Towing the machine” on page 3-117.
Transportation
• The transportation vehicle must have sufficient load capacity and platform size to
safely transport the machine. Refer to section 6 of this manual to determine the
physical characteristics of the machine before loading and transporting.
• Use OSHA-approved straps, chains or cables to securely fasten the telescopic
loader to the surface of the transportation vehicle.
• Use the tie-down points provided on the load surface of the transportation vehicle.
• Attach the tie-down devices to the machine at the designated tie-down points.
• Confirm that the machine tie-down procedures will prevent sideways, forward,
rearward, and upward motion of the machine in the event the transportation
vehicle is involved in an incident or sudden avoidance maneuver.
2.9 Safety instructions for maintenance

General information on maintenance
• Observe the prescribed intervals or those specified in this Operator's Manual for routine
checks/inspections and maintenance.
• For inspection and maintenance, ensure that all tools and service center equipment are
capable of performing the tasks prescribed. Do not use any damaged or malfunctioning
tools. Use certified measuring devices that are routinely calibrated for accuracy
(torque wrench, pressure gage, ammeter, etc.).
• Replace hydraulic hoses within stipulated and appropriate intervals even if no
safety-relevant defects have been detected.
• Ensure that all consumables and replaced parts are disposed of safely and with
minimum environmental impact.
• Always tighten any screws, electrical connections or hose connections that may
have become loose during maintenance.
• Upon completion of the maintenance and repair work, immediately refit and check
any safety devices removed for set-up or maintenance purposes.

Safety instructions
Personal safety measures

• Brief the technician and the operator before beginning maintenance or repair work.
Appoint someone to supervise the activities.
• Always work in groups of two when diagnosing a machine problem requiring the
engine to be running. Both persons must be trained on the machine – one person
must be seated on the seat and maintain visual contact with the other person.
• Observe the specific safety instructions in the maintenance section of this
Operator's Manual.
• Always keep a safe distance from all rotating and moving parts, for example,
fan blades, V-belt drives, PTO shaft drives, fans, etc.
• Before starting work on the machine, always ensure safe blocking/support.
• Apply special care when working on the fuel system due to the increased fire hazard.
• The engine and the exhaust system become very hot during operation and
require cool-down time after machine is shut off. Avoid contact with hot parts.
Wait for the machine to cool down before touching components.
• Retainer pins can fly out or splinter when struck with force.
Avoid striking the pins during operation, repair or maintenance.
Preparing for maintenance and repair work

• Prior to performing repair and maintenance, always attach a warning label such as
“Repair work – do not start machine!” to the control elements as a precautionary
measure.
• Observe the startup and shutdown procedures set forth in this Operator's Manual. This
applies to any work concerning the operation, conversion or adjustment of the machine
and its safety-oriented devices, or any work related to inspection and maintenance.
• Prior to performing assembly work on the machine, stabilize the area under repair and
use proper lifting and support devices to change parts weighing more than
9 kg (20 lbs.).
• Perform maintenance ONLY if:
• the machine is positioned on firm and level ground
• the machine is secured against unintentional movement
• all hydraulically movable attachments and working equipment have been lowered
to the ground
• the engine is stopped
• the starting key has been removed
• the pressure accumulator is discharged
• Perform maintenance beneath a raised machine, attachments or additional equipment
ONLY if a safe and secure support has been provided. The use of hydraulic cylinders or
jacks as the sole method of support does NOT sufficiently secure raised machines or
equipment/attachments!

Safety instructions
Performing maintenance and repairs

• Observe the adjustment, maintenance and inspection activities and intervals set
forth in this Operator's Manual, including information on the replacement of parts
and subassemblies. These activities must be performed only by qualified personnel.
• Disconnect the negative battery terminal when working on the electrical system.
• The machine may not be serviced, repaired or test-driven by unauthorized personnel.
• Wear a safety harness when performing maintenance at greater heights. Keep all
handholds, steps, handrails, platforms, landings, and ladders free from dirt, snow,
and ice.
• Always use specially designed or otherwise safety-oriented ladders and working
platforms to perform overhead assembly work. NEVER use machine parts or
attachments/superstructures as a climbing aid!
• Do not use the work equipment as lifting platforms for persons.
• In accordance with this Operator's Manual and instructions for the respective assembly,
release the pressure in all system sections and pressure lines (hydraulic system)
before performing any maintenance!
• Straightening and welding work on the ROPS is prohibited.
Replace ROPS parts by original Wacker Neuson spare parts.
2.10 Special hazards

Battery
• In case of a frozen battery or of an insufficient electrolyte level, do not try starting
the machine with battery jumper cables. The battery can burst or explode.
• Batteries contain caustic sulfuric acid. When handling the battery observe the
specific safety instructions and regulations relevant to accident prevention.
• A volatile oxyhydrogen mixture forms in batteries during normal operation and
especially when charging. Always wear gloves and eye protection when working
with batteries.
• Starting the machine with a battery jumper cable can be dangerous if performed
improperly. Observe the safety instructions regarding the battery.
Tires
• Repair work on the tires must be performed only by trained technical personnel or
by an authorized service center.
• Damaged tires and incorrect tire pressure reduce the operational safety of the machine.
Check the tires regularly for correct tire pressure and visible damage.
• Explosion hazard: Do not use flammable gases to inflate tires. Use only compressed air.
• Check the tightness of the wheel lug nuts regularly per the Maintenance Plan in this
Operator's Manual.

Safety instructions
Electrical energy
• Use only original fuses with the specified current rating.
• In case of electrical system malfunctions, stop the machine immediately, disconnect the
battery (by using the battery master switch), and perform troubleshooting procedures.
• When working with the machine, maintain a safe distance from overhead electric lines!
If work must be performed close to overhead lines, the equipment and attachments
must be kept well away from them.
• If the machine comes into contact with a live wire:
• Immediately drive the machine out of the danger zone.
• Warn others against approaching and touching the machine.
• Do not leave the machine until the line that has been touched or damaged has
been safely de-energized!
• Ensure that work on the electrical system is performed only by a technician with
appropriate training, in accordance with applicable electrical engineering codes.
• Inspect and check the electric equipment of the machine at regular intervals.
Defects such as loose connections or scorched cables must be repaired immediately.
• Observe the operating voltage of the machine/attachments. The voltages must be
compatible (12 V), and confirm that an appropriate fuse or circuit breaker is
incorporated in the system to prevent damage from malfunction or short circuit.
• Always remove the grounding strap from the battery when working on the electrical
system.
Hydraulic system
• Check all lines, hoses and threaded fittings regularly for leaks and visible damage.
Repair any damage and leaks immediately. Splashed oil can cause injury and fire!
Noise
• Close all doors and windows if practical.
• Wear ear protection. This is especially important when working in enclosed areas.
Safety data sheet

• When handling oil, grease, and other chemical substances such as battery electrolyte
or hydraulic fluid, observe the product-related safety regulations (Material Safety Data
Sheet, MSDS).

Safety instructions
2.11 Safety instructions for internal combustion engines

WARNING
Internal combustion engines present special hazards during operation and

fueling. Failure to follow the warnings and safety instructions can cause
serious injury or death.
☞ Read and follow the warning instructions in the engine owner's manual
and the safety guidelines below.
Running engine
When running the engine:
• Keep the area around exhaust pipe free of flammable materials.
• Check the fuel lines and the fuel tank for leaks and cracks before starting the engine.
Do not run the machine if fuel leaks are present or the fuel lines are loose.
When running the engine:
• Engine exhaust CAN KILL YOU IN MINUTES. Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide. This is a poison you cannot see or smell. Never run the machine indoors
or in an enclosed area such as a deep trench unless adequate ventilation, through
such items as exhaust fans or hoses, is provided.
• Do not smoke while operating the machine.
• Do not run the engine near open flames.
• Do not touch the engine or exhaust while the engine is on or immediately after
it has been turned off.
• Do not operate a machine when its fuel cap is loose or missing.
• Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is running or hot.
The radiator fluid is hot and under pressure and can cause serious burns!
Fueling the engine

When fueling the engine:
• Wipe away fuel spills immediately.
• Refill the fuel tank in a well-ventilated area.
• Replace the fuel tank cap after refueling.
When fueling the engine:
• Do not smoke.
• Do not refuel a hot or running engine.
• Do not refuel the engine near an open flame.

Safety instructions
Notes:

Operation
Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Description of control elements
This chapter describes the controls, and contains information on the function and the handling of the indicator lights and controls in the cabin.
The pages stated in the table refer to the description of the controls.
A combination of digits, or a combination of digits and letters (for example 40/18 or 40/A) used for identifying the control elements, means:
fig. no. 40/control element no. 18 or position A in fig. no. 40
Figures carry no numbers if they are placed to the left of the text.
You can unfold pages (3-2 and/or 3-4) for a better overview. Cabin overview: see overleaf
The symbols used in the description have the following meanings:
• This symbol stands for a list
• Subdivision within lists or an activity. Follow the steps in the recommended order
☞ This symbol requires you to perform the activity described
➥ Description of the effects or results of an activity
n. s. = not shown
“Option” = optional equipment
Stated whenever controls or other components of the machine are installed as an option.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b310.fm 3-1

Operation
2 5 36 1 2
3.2 Cabin overview
3
Ro of console For more information see page
4 1 Sun visor
2 Air conditioning vent (option)
5 3 Interior light ...................................................................................................................................................................................3-56
Cabin
6 4 Wiper motor (front) ........................................................................................................................................................................3-61

5 Leg room air vent ..........................................................................................................................................................................3-59
6 Accelerator pedal ..........................................................................................................................................................................3-42
7
7 Safe load indicator ........................................................................................................................................................................3-62
8 Indicating instrument
35 8 9 Side window lock...........................................................................................................................................................................3-14
10 Control lever (joystick)......................................................................................................................................................... 3-64, 3-65
34 9 11 3rd control circuit control lever ......................................................................................................................................................3-66
12 Arrester – cabin door on the left/window on the right.......................................................................................................... 3-12, 3-14
33 10 13 Switch panel – speed range, quickhitch lock ............................................................................................................. 3-49, 3-66, 3-67
14 Lever – horizontal seat adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................3-17
32 11 15 Parking brake lever .......................................................................................................................................................................3-47
16 Switch panel
31 17 Fuse box .........................................................................................................................................................................................6-6
12
18 Instrument panel
19 Prepared installation for radio (option)
12
13 20 Rear wiper motor...........................................................................................................................................................................3-61
21 Bracket – cabin door arrester on the left/window on the right ............................................................................................. 3-12, 3-14
30
14 22 Storage net for Operator’s Manual
23 Lever – backrest adjustment .........................................................................................................................................................3-17
29 24 Operator seat ................................................................................................................................................................................3-16
15
25 Storage compartment1/air conditioning (option)
28 26 Air conditioning rotary switch (option) ...........................................................................................................................................3-60
16
27 Fixture – first-aid kit
27 28 Seat belt ........................................................................................................................................................................................3-18
17
29 Weight adjustment lever................................................................................................................................................................3-16
26 30 Steering wheel
18
31 Multifunctional lever ......................................................................................................................................................................3-57
25 32 Outside handhold – door...............................................................................................................................................................3-12
19 33 (Hydrostatic) service brake/inching pedal .....................................................................................................................................3-45
24 34 Washer system reservoir ..............................................................................................................................................................3-61
20 35 Brake fluid reservoir ......................................................................................................................................................................5-33
36 Front window defroster vents ........................................................................................................................................................3-59
23
21 1. Not installed if equipped with air conditioning option
21
22
Fig. 31 : Cabin overview
3-2 BA 34611 US – Edi-

Operation
Cabin overview: see overleaf Cabin overview: see overleaf
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b310.fm 3-3

Operation
43 44 45 46 47 3.3 Instrument panel, multifunctional lever and drive lever (overview)

Instrument panel For more information see page
42 48 37 On-board voltage
38 Not assigned
41 49 39 Operating hours
40 Indicator light (red) – coolant level................................................................................................................................................ 5-13
40 50 41 Indicator light (red) – right/left turn indicator for rear attachments................................................................................................ 3-57
42 Indicator light (green) – right/left turn indicators ........................................................................................................................... 3-57
43 Indicator light (red) – hydraulic oil filter......................................................................................................................................... 5-10
39 44 Indicator light (red) – hydraulic oil temperature ............................................................................................................................ 5-22
51 45 Indicator light (red) – alternator charge function........................................................................................................................... 3-31
38
46 Indicator light (red) – parking brake.............................................................................................................................................. 3-47
37 56 55 54 53 52 47 Indicator light (red) – engine oil pressure .............................................................................................................................. 3-31, 5-9
48 Indicator light (red) – diesel engine temperature ................................................................................................................... 3-31, 5-8
57 58 59
Fig. 32 : Instrument panel overview
11 49 Indicator light (blue) – high beam ................................................................................................................................................. 3-55
50 Indicator light (yellow) – hose burst valve 1 (option)................................................................................................................... 3-116
60
51 Fuel level indicator
I 0
61 52 Not assigned
53 Not assigned
31 62
Fig. 33 : Multifunctional lever
54 Not assigned
63 55 Not assigned
81 56 Not assigned
64
Multifunctional lever
80 65 57 Horn push button .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-57
79 76 58 Push button – front/rear washer system....................................................................................................................................... 3-61
66
59 Rotary switch/switch – front wiper/turn indicators/high beam....................................................................................................... 3-61
77 Side console on the right
67
78 60 Switch – speed range selection.................................................................................................................................................... 3-49
68 61 Push button for unlocking the quickhitch lock......................................................................................................................3-66, 3-67
10
62 Parking lights/low beam switch..................................................................................................................................................... 3-55
69
63 Switch with lock (green) – 3rd control circuit lock (option)............................................................................................................ 3-67
70 64 Switch with lock (green) – continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (option)............................................................................. 3-69
65 Heater fan switch.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-59
Fig. 34 : Control lever (standard) 71
66 Switch – rear working lights (standard on the left/option on the right).......................................................................................... 3-56
82 83 67 Switch – load stabilizer (option).................................................................................................................................................... 3-52
84
68 Switch – front working lights (option)............................................................................................................................................ 3-56
17 69 Switch – front socket (option) ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-54
85
70 Not assigned
86 72 71 Switch – rotating beacon (option) ................................................................................................................................................. 3-58
89 72 Preheating start switch (engine start) .......................................................................................................................................... 3-29
87 73 73 Hazard warning switch ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-57
10
88 74 Socket/12 V power outlet
74
75 Rotary switch – heating (warm/cold)
Fig. 35 : Control levers (option) 1. Hose burst valve is not functional with the load stabilizer switched on (indicator light illuminates)
75
Fig. 36 : Console on the left (overview)
3-4 BA 34611 US – Edition

Operation
Operation
3.4 Drive lever (overview)

Control lever without 3rd control circuit lock (standard) For more information see page
76 Push button – extend telescopic boom......................................................................................................................................... 3-73
77 Push button – retract telescopic boom ......................................................................................................................................... 3-74
78 Push button – neutral speed range .....................................................................................................................................3-49, 3-50
79 Indicator light (green) – reverse travel direction ........................................................................................................................... 3-50
80 Switch – travel direction selection (forward/reverse) .................................................................................................................... 3-50
81 Indicator light (green) – forward travel direction ........................................................................................................................... 3-50
Control lever with 3rd control lever lock (option) For more information see page
82 Indicator light (green) – forward travel direction ........................................................................................................................... 3-50
83 Indicator light (green) – reverse travel direction ........................................................................................................................... 3-50
84 Push button – additional function “plus powerflow” (option) ......................................................................................................... 3-72
85 Switch – extend/retract telescopic boom .............................................................................................................................3-73, 3-74
86 Switch – forward/reverse travel direction...................................................................................................................................... 3-50
87 Push button – neutral traveling direction .............................................................................................................................3-49, 3-50
88 Not assigned
89 Switch – lock/unlock 3rd control circuit for quickhitch (option) ............................................................................................3-66, 3-67
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b320.fm 3-5

Operation
3.5 Indicator lights and warning lights: description

Indicator light check
When the starter is switched on, all indicator lights on the indicating instrument illuminatef
briefly for a check and then go out after a few seconds.
45
IMPORTANT
46 P Indicator lights 45/46/47 remain lit when the starter is turned on!
47 CAUTION
For your own safety and in order to avoid consequential damage to the
machine, have malfunctioning indicator lights immediately checked or replaced
by an authorized service center!
3.6 Indicator lights and warning lights: description

Indicator light (red) – coolant level
Indicates that the coolant level in the radiator is too low:
40 ☞ Check the coolant system for leaks, have possible damage repaired by an authorized
service center.
☞ Add coolant
Indicator light (green) – right/left turn indicators for rear attachment

Flashes intermittently when the turn indicators are used and a front or rear attachment is
41 connected electrically.
Indicator light (green) – right/left turn indicators

Flashes intermittently when operating the turn indicators
42
Indicator light (red) – hydraulic oil filter

Indicates inadmissibly high pressure in the hydraulic return line to the reservoir. In this
43 case:
☞ Have the hydraulic oil return filter checked and, if necessary, replaced by an authorized
service center
☞ - see Monitoring the hydraulic oil return filter on page 5-22
3-6 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b320.fm

Operation
Indicator light (red) – hydraulic oil temperature

Illuminates if hydraulic oil temperature exceeds 95 °C (203 °F).
44
CAUTION
Risk of hydraulic damage as soon as the indicator light illuminates!
☞ Release the pressure on the work and drive hydraulics. To do this:
• Stop the machine in a suitable place
• Move the loader unit control lever to neutral
• Move the drive lever to neutral
• Run the engine at increased speed until indicator light 44 goes out
Indicator light (red) – alternator charge function

The indicator light illuminates when the starter is turned on and goes out as soon as the
45 engine runs.
The V-belt is malfunctioning or there is an error in the charging circuit of the alternator if
the indicator light illuminates with the engine running. The battery is no longer charged.
Indicator light (red) – parking brake

Illuminates when the parking brake is applied.
46
P The electric traveling interlock prevents starting the engine with the parking brake applied.
Indicator light (red) – engine oil pressure

47 Illuminates if the engine oil pressure is too low. In this case:
☞ Stop the machine
☞ Stop the engine immediately and check the oil level
– see chapter 5 “Checking the oil level once a day” on page 5-8
The indicator light illuminates when the starter is turned on and goes out as soon as the
engine runs.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b320.fm 3-7

Operation
Indicator light (red) – diesel engine temperature indicator

Indicates the engine temperature detected by a sensor (coolant).
48 Risk of engine breakdown if the indicator light illuminates with the engine running!
CAUTION
Engine temperature should be between 80°C (176°F) and 105°C (221°F).
Max. permissible engine temperature is 110 °C.
☞ An alarm sounds if the engine temperature is 111 °C (230 °F) or higher
☞ To cool down: let the engine run at idling speed briefly, then stop it
• The alarm does not sound any longer if the engine temperature is
101 °C (213.8 °F) or lower
☞ Check the cooling system– see chapter 5 “Engine and hydraulics cooling
system” on page 5-10
Indicator light (blue) – high beam

Illuminates if high beam is switched on, or during headlight flashing.
49
Indicator light (yellow) – hose burst valve (option)

Indicates that the hose burst valve is switched off.
50 The hose burst valve is not active if the load stabilizer is switched on.
➥ Indicator light illuminates
☞ - see Load stabilizer (option) on page 3-52
☞ - see “Hose burst valve” safety feature on page 3-116
3-8 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b320.fm

Operation
3.7 Putting into operation for the first time

Safety instructions
• Only use the steps and handholds provided when entering and leaving the cabin
• Never use the controls or movable lines and cables as handholds
• Never get on or off a moving machine! Never jump off the machine
• Refer to the load diagrams for the pallet forks on the telescopic boom
Important information
• The machine may only be put into operation by trained technicians. See “Selection
and qualification of personnel, basic responsibilities” in this Operator’s Manual.
• The operator must have read and understood this Operator’s Manual before putting
the machine into operation
• The machine must only be used in serviceable condition in accordance with its
designated use and the instructions set forth in the Operator’s Manual, and only by
persons who are fully aware of the risks involved in operating the machine
• Go through the “Start-up” checklist in the following chapter
Running-in period
Handle the machine carefully during its first 100 operating hours.
The future performance and service life of the machine are heavily dependent on the
observance of the following recommendations during the running-in period.
• Do not overload the machine, but at the same time do not drive too cautiously either,
as the machine will not reach its correct operating temperature
• Do not run the engine at high speed for extended periods
• Increase the load gradually while varying the engine speed
• Strictly observe maintenance schedules and perform (or have performed)
the specified maintenance
– see chapter 5 “Maintenance plan” on page 5-62
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b320.fm 3-9

Operation
3.8 Check lists

The checklists below are intended to assist you in checking and monitoring the machine
before, during and after operation.
These checklists cannot claim to be exhaustive; they are merely intended as an aid for
you in fulfilling your duties as a conscientious operator.
The checking and monitoring work listed below is described in greater detail in the
following chapters.
If the answer to one of the following questions is NO, first rectify the cause of the fault
before starting or continuing work.
Start-up checklist
Check the following points before putting the machine into operation or starting the engine:
No. Question ✔
1 Enough fuel in the tank? (➠ 5-5)
2 Engine oil level OK? (➠ 5-8)
3 Oil level in hydraulic oil reservoir OK? (➠ 5-9)
4 Water level in washer reservoir OK? (➠ 3-61)
5 V-belt condition and tension checked? (➠ 5-18)
6 Telescopic boom lubricated? (➠ 5-27)
7 Braking system (including parking brake) OK? (➠ 3-45)
8 Tire condition and inflation pressure OK? (➠5-34, 6-8)
9 Wheel nuts safely tightened (especially after a wheel change)? (➠ 6-10)
Lights, signals, indicators, warning lights and indicator lights OK?
10
(➠ 3-55, 3-57, 3-6)
11 Windows, mirrors, lights and steps clean?
12 Attachment safely locked on telescopic boom? (➠ 3-66, 3-67)
13 Engine cover safely locked? (➠ 3-20)
Especially after cleaning, maintenance or repair work:
14
Rags, tools and other loose objects removed?
Approved warning triangle, hazard warning light and first aid kit in the
15
machine?
16 Seat position and rearview mirrors correctly adjusted? (➠ 3-16)
17 Seat belt fastened? (➠ 3-18)
3-10 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b320.fm

Operation
Operation checklist
After starting the engine and during operation, check and observe the following points:
No. Question ✔
1 Indicator lights for engine oil pressure and alternator gone out? (➠ 3-31)
2 Braking effect sufficient? (➠ 3-45)
3 Temperature gage for engine coolant in normal range? (➠ 3-6)
4 Steering system working properly? (➠ 3-41)
5 Anyone in the danger zone of the machine? (➠ 2-1)
7 3rd control circuit locked? (➠ 3-39, 3-40)
During machine travel on public roads, particular attention should be paid to
the following points:
9 Bucket and attachments in transport position? (➠ 3-37)
10 Transport locks installed? (➠ 3-37)
Control lever for lift and tilt hydraulics of the telescopic boom locked?
11
(➠ 3-39, 3-40)
12 Front-edge protection fitted to bucket?
“Parking” checklist
Check and observe the following points when parking the machine:
No. Question ✔
1 Attachments on telescopic boom lowered to the ground? (➠ 3-77)
2 Parking brake applied? (➠ 3-47)
3 Cabin locked, especially if the machine cannot be supervised? (➠ 3-12)
When parking on public roads:
4 Machine adequately secured? (➠ 3-47, 3-51)
When parking on slopes:
Machine additionally secured with chocks under the wheels to prevent it from
5
rolling away? (➠ 3-51)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b320.fm 3-11

Operation
Operation
3.9 Cabin
Safety instructions regarding cabin entrance and exit
CAUTION
Injury hazard!
In order to avoid injury hazard, remove dirt (oil, grease, earth, snow and ice)
from handholds, footholds and shoes before accessing the cabin
☞ Use only the machine footholds and handholds to access the cabin
☞ Face the machine as you enter and leave it
IMPORTANT
Cabin access on the left = main access and exit!
Fig. 37 : Label: emergency exit
Use the window on the right only in an emergency.
(see the emergency exit label)!
Secure the control lever (loader unit) and the 3rd control circuit before leaving
the cabin by the door on the right.
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd control
circuit (standard) on page 3-39 and
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and electrical locking of 3rd control cir-
cuit lever (option) on page 3-40
Locking/unlocking the door
WARNING
Crushing hazard.
An unlocked door can crush fingers and hit persons or objects near it.
☞ Close and lock the door before starting machine travel.
A Opening the door from the outside:

☞ Press door button A
Fig. 38 : Outside door opener and lock Locking the door:
☞ Lock the door with the starting key (turn to the right)
Unlocking the door:
☞ Unlock the door with the starting key (turn to the left)
3-12 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Opening the door from the inside:

☞ Pull handle B up
IMPORTANT
Enter and exit from the cabin only by means of the door on the left. In case of
an emergency the side window on the right may be used as emergency exit.
- see Side window emergency exit on page 3-15
Fig. 39 : Inside door opener
Releasing and securing an open door with the door arrester

Securing the open door with the door arrester:
21 12 ☞ Press the door against bracket 21 of the arrester until it engages with an audible click
IMPORTANT
Lubricate arrester 21 at regular intervals.
Fig. 40 : Securing an open door
Releasing the door arrester:

The door arrester is located on the left in the cabin
☞ Push lever B of the arrester forward
➥ The door is released from the lock by spring action
☞ Close the door
Fig. 41 : Unlocking the door arrester
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-13

Operation
Locking and unlocking the cabin window on the right
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. An unlocked side window can crush or hit persons or
objects near it.
☞ Close the window and secure it against the side wall of the cabin with the
lever - see Opening the side window on page 3-14.
☞ Do not operate the machine with an unsecured side window on the right.
☞ The machine can be operated if the window is open up to the final position
of the locking lever - see Locking the open side window on page 3-15.
Locking the side window

☞ Turn lever A down
A Unlocking the side window
☞ Turn lever A up
Fig. 42 : Unlocking/locking the side window
Opening the side window

☞ Turn lever A up
b ☞ Push lever A horizontally to the outside
☞ To fasten the window in its final position:
press the end of lever a downward in guide b
a
Fig. 43 : Opening the side window
Fully opening the side window

☞ Turn lever A up
b
☞ Push lever A horizontally to the outside
☞ In order to completely swing the window outward:
pull the end of lever a to the rear out of guide b
Fig. 44 : Fully opening the side window
3-14 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Locking the open side window

☞ Open the side window completely and press it against the arrester
➥ The side window locks into place and is locked
IMPORTANT
Lubricate the arrester at regular intervals!
Fig. 45 : Locking the side window
Unlocking the open side window

The side window can be unlocked from the inside only
☞ Press the push button (at the rear right in the cabin)
➥ The side window is released from the lock by spring action
☞ Close the side window
Fig. 46 : Unlocking the side window
3.10 Side window emergency exit

In case of an emergency, the side window can be used to exit the cabin if the door can no
longer be used.
WARNING
Risk of slipping and of injury, since the right side of the machine does not
have footholds or handholds for a safe access/exit.
☞ Use the ride side window only in an emergency!
☞ Open and secure the right side window
- see Locking the open side window on page 3-15
☞ Secure the control lever (loader unit) and the 3rd control circuit before l
eaving the cabin by the door on the right.
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd con-
trol circuit (standard) on page 3-39 and
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and electrical locking of 3rd control
circuit lever (option) on page 3-40
☞ Before resuming normal service, lock the window lock lever back into place
in the guide
- see Locking and unlocking the cabin window on the right on page 3-14
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-15

Operation
3.11 Seat
Seat adjustment (overview)
Always adjust the seat to your requirements in order to avoid or minimize damage to
health due to bad posture
Caution
Possible loss of machine control while adjusting the operator seat.
d ☞ Do not change the seat position during machine travel or operation.
☞ Adjust the operator seat before moving the machine.
☞ After adjusting the operator seat, ensure that it is firmly locked in the
required position.
☞ Do not operate the machine with an incorrectly working or malfunctioning
seat lock – repair or replace the lock before machine operation.
c
The operator seat can be set to the following positions:

e • b = weight adjustment a with weight indication
• c = height adjustment
f a b • d = armrest inclination
Fig. 47 : Seat adjustment • e = backrest adjustment (depending on version)
• f = horizontal adjustment
Weight adjustment
IMPORTANT
In order to achieve optimal seating comfort, adapt and adjust the seat
suspension to the operator’s weight. The correct adjustment of the seat
suspension avoids excessive movement, but still ensures the best
possible suspension.
a • Use lever a to adjust the seat suspension to the operator’s weight.
b The weight indicator b shows the set operator weight [kg].
Fig. 48 : Weight adjustment ☞ Sit down on the operator seat

To adjust to a higher weight:
☞ Turn lever a clockwise
➥ Read the weight off indication b
To adjust to a lower weight:
☞ Turn lever a counterclockwise
➥ Read the weight off indication b
3-16 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Height adjustment
Upward:
☞ Raise seat as required until it engages with an audible click
c
Downward:
☞ Raise seat as far as possible and
➥ Lower seat to bottom position
Fig. 49 : Height adjustment
Backrest adjustment
☞ Sit down on the operator seat
☞ Pull lever e up and at the same time
☞ Lean back to push the backrest into the required position
☞ Allow lever e to engage
Fig. 50 : Backrest adjustment
Horizontal adjustment
☞ Pull lever f up and at the same time
☞ Move the operator seat forward or backward
☞ Allow lever f to engage in required position
f
Fig. 51 : Horizontal seat adjustment with control lever
Armrest adjustment
The armrest can be folded back as required. Adjust the armrest as follows:
Upward:
g
☞ Turn handwheel g clockwise as required
Downward:
☞ Turn handwheel g counterclockwise as required
Fig. 52 : Armrest adjustment
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-17

Operation
3.12 Seat belt (lap belt)

Specific information on the seat belt
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. The seat belt safely keeps the operator in the seat
and ensures his optimal position when driving or working with the machine.
The seat belt also reduces the injury hazard in case the machine tips over
during operation.
☞ Always buckle up before moving or working with the machine.
☞ Do not twist the seat belt when you fasten it or when it is in use.
Fig. 53 : Seat belt label
☞ Seat belt must run over the hips – not over the stomach – and must
always be applied tightly.
☞ Do not place the seat belt over hard, edged or fragile items
(tools, rulers, glasses, pen) carried inside your clothes.
☞ Never buckle up 2 persons with one seat belt.
☞ Check the seat belts each time you use the machine. Have damaged
parts immediately replaced by an authorized service center before using
the machine.
☞ Always keep the seat belt and buckle clean, as dirt and debris can cause the
buckle to malfunction and accelerate internal webbing abrasion in the belt.
☞ Seat belt buckle must not be obstructed by foreign bodies
(paper or similar); otherwise the buckle latch cannot lock into place!
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. After an accident the belt strap is stretched and no
longer serviceable. The seat belt will NOT provide adequate protection in
the future!
☞ Replace the seat belt after an accident.
☞ Have fastening points and seat fixture examined for damage or failure.
Repair or replace if damaged.
3-18 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Fastening the seat belt

The seat belt is for the operator’s safety during work on construction sites and during
road travel.
Fasten seat belt 28 as follows before starting machine travel:
A ☞ Hold belt on buckle latch A and run it slowly and steadily over the hips to buckle B
28 ☞ Insert buckle latch A into buckle B until it engages audibly (pull test)
☞ Tighten the seat belt by pulling at its end
B ➥ The seat belt must always be tightly in place over the hips!
0763b0007.eps
Fig. 54 : Fastening the seat belt
Unfastening the seat belt

Unfasten the seat belt as follows:
☞ Hold the seat belt
☞ Press red button C on buckle B
➥ Latch A is released from buckle B by spring action
☞ Slowly return the seat belt to the retractor (option)
A
B
30763b0006.eps
Fig. 55 : Unfastening the seat belt
Longer/shorter lap belt adjustment

☞ Lengthen the lap belt as follows:
A
• Hold buckle latch A at a right angle to the seat belt and pull the seat belt to the
required length
☞ To shorten the lap belt, just pull the free end D of the belt
IMPORTANT
When pulled slowly, the automatic seat belt offers full freedom of movement.
It locks however during abrupt braking.
The automatic seat belt may also lock when passing through potholes or
D uneven terrain.
30763b0005.eps
Fig. 56 : Longer/shorter seat belt adjustment
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-19

Operation
3.13 Opening/closing the engine cover

Opening:
A ☞ Press lock A
☞ Pull the engine cover upward
Closing:
☞ Firmly press down the engine cover until lock A engages with an audible click
L R Locking and unlocking:
The engine cover is locked with the starting key of preheating start switch.
Fig. 57 : Engine cover lock
3.14 Battery master switch (option)

Interrupting power supply
The battery master switch is located in the engine compartment near the battery
☞ Turn and remove the key of the battery master switch (notched position)
Switching on power supply

☞ Insert the key in the battery master switch
☞ Turn the key to the notched position
3.15 Protective screens for front window and/or main lights (option)
Removing the protective screens for machine travel on public roads
The telescopic loader can be fitted with protective screens on the front window and/or
the main lights as a protection against falling material.
CAUTION
The protective screens may be used only for work operation and must be
removed when traveling on public roads!
☞ The protective screens have no National Type Approval (Germany)
or data confirmation (Germany), and no licencing according to StVZO
(German road traffic regulations)
3.16 Location of fire extinguisher (option)

The fire extinguisher is not included in the machine’s standard equipment (option).
☞ If a fire extinguisher is installed, it must be certified for oil fires and electrical fires.
For more information and for questions regarding installation, contact your local
authorities and stores specialized in fire fighting equipment.
☞ Location:
On the rear cabin wall, to the left of the seat (see the figure)
IMPORTANT
Fig. 58 : Fire extinguisher (option)
The fire extinguisher must be refilled and sealed by authorized personnel
after it has been used.
3-20 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.17 Key-based drive interlock (option)

Key-based drive interlock: scope of delivery
The drive interlock is integrated in the starter and can be enabled only with the blue
starting keys!
Scope of delivery:
• Drive interlock installed in the machine
• 2 x blue keys (coded)
• 1 x red master key (for coding a blue key)
Coding (“training”) new starting keys

New personal keys are coded with the master key (red). This is why it must be carefully
stored outside the machine.
IMPORTANT
Each drive interlock has only one master key!
☞ The drive interlock must be replaced if the master key is lost
IMPORTANT
Switch on the machine lights (side marker lights) before coding the new key (blue).
☞ Switch on the machine lights – see chapter 3 “Machine lights” on page 3-55
• Code the blue key according to the Operator’s Manual

• The master key is only used for coding new keys, and cannot be used for disabling
the drive interlock
• Coding is performed by inserting the master key in the starter and by turning it to
position 1 for a maximum 5 seconds. After the master key has been returned to position
0 and removed, you have 15 seconds for inserting a key that requires coding.
It must be inserted in the starter and turned to position 1 in order to be registered as
a valid key
• Coding is automatically stopped if no key requiring coding is detected within 15 seconds
• Several keys requiring coding can be inserted one after another in the starter
• Each key must remain at least 1 second in position 1
• Coding can be performed for a maximum 10 keys
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-21

Operation
Enabling (locking) the drive interlock

☞ Apply the parking brake
➥ - see Parking brake on page 3-47
☞ Stop the engine
☞ Remove the starting key (blue)
➥ The drive interlock is enabled in 30 seconds
IMPORTANT
The drive interlock remains disabled if the starting key (blue) is not removed
from the starter!
Disabling (releasing) the drive interlock

Start and stop the engine exactly as described on page 3-31 “Starting the engine”.
☞ The system is enabled 5 seconds after the starting key is inserted in the starter
☞ Start the engine - see Starting the engine on page 3-31
➥ The drive interlock is disabled as long as the engine runs
Deleting coded keys

Deleting coded keys is necessary whenever a coded key is lost
IMPORTANT
A coded key cannot be deleted unless the machine lights (side marker
lights) are switched on.
☞ Switch on the machine lights – see chapter 3 “Machine lights” on page 3-55
• All coded keys are deleted during deletion

• After deletion has been performed, all existing keys can be recoded
• Deletion is performed by inserting the master key in the starter and
by turning it to position 1 for a minimum 20 seconds
• All coded keys are then deleted, and all existing keys can be recoded
• The master key code is not deleted during deletion
3-22 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Safety functions
The drive interlock remains enabled for 15 minutes and does not accept any valid keys
if more than 5 keys with different invalid codes are inserted and turned in the starter
within 1 minute.
This function avoids ‘finding’ the correct key by chance by trying different keys.
It is only available if the control valve relay is connected in addition with terminal 30.
The drive interlock remains enabled for 15 minutes and does not accept any valid keys
if several invalid keys have been detected without having set the starter to position 0.
Valid keys are accepted only after 15 minutes and after the position 0 of the starter
has been detected. This avoids testing keys without actuating the mechanical starter,
for example by moving the starter to position 1 by force.
Interruptions of the supply line or other control lines do not disable the drive interlock
or delete data (data codes, for example). All important data is saved in a non-volatile
memory.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-23

Operation
3.18 Drive interlock with code input (option)

Keypad for entering codes (overview)
The drive interlock is enabled or disabled with “personal” codes entered via the keypad.
Two codes are available:
• The existing unchangeable six-digit main code for disabling the drive interlock,
for entering a personal code or for changing the personal code
• The four, five or six-digit personal code is used for disabling the drive interlock
and is entered by the operator
IMPORTANT
We recommend using the personal code for disabling the system.
LED ☞ Keep the main code in a safe place.
Fig. 59 : Drive interlock (code input option)
The keypad consists of:
• 10 numeric keys for entering the codes
• A (*) key for confirming the code that has been entered
• An LED (red indicator light)
• An internal acoustic signal for signaling specific procedures
➥ Example: a signal sounds to confirm a key has been pressed
The keypad illuminates:
• When pressing any key
• The keypad flashes to indicate specific system statuses
3-24 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Entering/changing the personal code

In order to enter or change the personal code:
☞ Disable the drive interlock by entering the main code (6 digits) and pressing the (*) key
☞ Turn the starting key to position 1
➥ The LED illuminates for 2 seconds
☞ Enter the 4, 5 or 6-digit new personal code and confirm with the (*) key within
20 seconds after the LED has gone out
☞ Enter the new personal code again and confirm it with the (*) key after a short
flashing of the LED
➥ Confirmation: LED flashes twice briefly, then illuminates for 2 seconds
☞ Turn the starting key to the 0 position and remove it as soon as the LED goes out
➥ The new personal code is now set and can be used for disabling the drive interlock.
IMPORTANT
The personal code must be entered correctly twice consecutively otherwise
an error is indicated by means of a single flashing of the LED:
☞ Codes consisting of 3 and less, or of more than 6 digits are ignored by
the system
☞ Simple codes (with identical or consecutive digits, for example 1, 2, 3, 4)
are rejected by the system with four short acoustic signals
☞ Entering a new personal codes replaces the previous code.
A code can be changed any time if the main code is known
Enabling the drive interlock

☞ Stop the engine and remove the starting key
➥ The drive interlock is automatically enabled
➥ Flashing LED (on the keypad)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-25

Operation
Disabling the drive interlock

☞ Enter the personal code or main code (6 digits).
☞ Press the (*) key.
➥ Confirmation: 2 long acoustic signals and long LED flashing
➥ LED OFF = drive interlock is disabled
➥ Diesel engine can be started
If the diesel engine cannot be started: the wrong code has been entered
➥ Confirmation: 4 short acoustic signals, flashing LED = wrong code
➥ Re-enter the code
☞ Turn the starting key and switch on the engine before the LED flashes again
(30 seconds)
IMPORTANT
The keypad is blocked for 5 minutes and no codes can be entered if the
wrong code is entered four times consecutively.
☞ Enter the code after 5 minutes
• The keypad does not illuminate as long as it is blocked. It illuminates
briefly every 4 seconds and an acoustic signal sounds
☞ Press the (*) key after every code
☞ The LED illuminates briefly when turning the starting key to position
“Engine start”
3-26 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Putting the drive interlock out of operation

We recommend putting the drive interlock out of operation if the machine has to stay
in a service center, for example, or if the machine does not require any protection.
This avoids having to communicate the code.
1 Disable the system by entering the personal or main code and by confirming with the (*) key
2 Turn the starting key to position 1
➥ The LED illuminates for 2 seconds
3 As soon as the LED goes out, press the (*) push button for about 2 seconds until a
short acoustic signal, followed by two further signals, sounds
➥ The LED now flashes very slowly, and the keypad is disabled
4 Turn the starting key to 0 and remove it
5 The engine can be started without entering the code.
The system is out of service even if electric power is interrupted.
IMPORTANT
If the system is out of operation, the LED flashes slowly even if the starting key
is in position 1.
☞ Entering the personal or main code does not have the effect of putting the
system back into operation again (the acoustic signals for confirmation are
still given). See the following procedure for putting back into operation
again, to leave the out-of-operation status again
Putting the drive interlock back into operation again

☞ Press the (*) key for 2 seconds (starting key in position 0) until two short acoustic
signals are given for confirmation
➥ The system is enabled again. The code must be entered to start the engine.
Interruption of drive interlock power

If the drive interlock was enabled before electric power was interrupted, short acoustic sig-
nals are given upon switching on the keypad (similar to those that are given when entering
the wrong code four times). In this case, wait until the acoustic signals are no longer given.
Then disable the drive interlock with the personal or main code.
The LED still does not illuminate if the drive interlock was disabled. The engine can be
started before the LED starts flashing again.
If the drive interlock was out of operation, this status remains unchanged and the LED
flashes slowly.
Drive interlock maintenance

The drive interlock does not require any maintenance.
Protect the keypad and the control unit from heat and humidity.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-27

Operation
3.19 Oil and fuel preheater (option)

Oil preheater operation
This equipment is for cold-starting at temperatures below −5 °C (23 °F).
The engine and hydraulic oil is heated by means of heating elements with a capacity of
750 W in the engine oil pan and in the hydraulic oil reservoir, according to the gravity
principle (warm oil rises and is replaced by cold oil). The oil can only be thoroughly
warmed up to operating temperature if the oil preheater is connected over a longer
A period of time – preferably over night.
☞ Connect the oil preheater as follows:
• Park the machine near a 220 V socket
• First connect special cable A with machine socket B, then
• Insert the plug into the 220 V socket
Fig. 60 : Oil preheater
☞ Before starting the engine:
• Remove the plug from the 220 V socket
• Unplug special cable A from machine socket B
• Close the engine cover
Fuel preheater operation

The fuel preheater prevents paraffin crystals forming, which otherwise clog the fuel filter
at low temperatures.
A temperature switch automatically switches on a heating element in the fuel line between
the tank and the fuel prefilter when the starter is actuated at temperatures below + 10 °C
(50 °F).
3-28 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.20 Putting the diesel engine into operation
WARNING
Accident hazard. Injury hazard due to uncontrolled machine.
☞ Sit down on the operator seat before putting the machine into operation
☞ Perform the following preparations
Notices on preparing to start the engine
IMPORTANT
The engine cannot be started unless the parking brake is applied
to the last notch and the drive interlock is disabled (option)
- see Parking brake on page 3-47
- see Drive interlock with code input (option) on page 3-24
- see Key-based drive interlock (option) on page 3-21
• If the engine does not start, interrupt the start attempt after
a max. 20 seconds so that the battery can recover
• Repeat the start attempt only after about 1 minute
• The engine cannot be started by tow starting the machine,
as there is no driving connection between the engine and the
gearbox (cardan shaft, for example) when the engine is stopped
- see Towing the machine on page 3-117
IMPORTANT
Starter actuation is automatically disabled if the engine is running
(start repeat interlock).
IMPORTANT
When the machine is used for extended periods at outside temperatures
below −10 °C (14 °F), we recommend retrofitting the machine with an
engine preheater (“oil preheater” option)
- see Oil and fuel preheater (option) on page 3-28.
IMPORTANT
All controls must be within easy reach. You must be able to move the brake
and accelerator pedals to their limit positions.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-29

Operation
Preparing to start the engine

0☞ Run through the “Start-up” checklist 3-10
☞ Switch on the battery master switch - see Battery master switch (option) on page 3-20
☞ Apply the parking brake to the last notch - see Parking brake on page 3-47
☞ Adjust your seating position- see Seat on page 3-16
➥ All controls must be within easy reach
➥ You must be able to move the brake and accelerator pedals to their limit positions
☞ Adjust the rearview mirror (you must be able to see the rear area of the machine)
☞ Fasten your seat belt - see Seat belt (lap belt) on page 3-18
☞ Disabling the drive interlock- see Disabling (releasing) the drive interlock on page 3-22
☞ Set the manual throttle (option) to idling speed - see Manual throttle (option) on page 3-
43
☞ Set the low-speed control to the zero position
- see Low-speed control (option) on page 3-44
☞ Set the control lever for the loader unit to neutral
- see Selecting a speed range and starting machine travel on page 3-49
Notices on starting the engine

NOTICE: In order to avoid damage to the engine and the exhaust turbocharger due to
insufficient lube oil supply:
☞ Do not run the cold engine at full throttle when starting
☞ Do not stop the engine from full throttle
☞ Let the engine warm up at low idling speed (1/4 throttle) for about 30 seconds
☞ When the engine runs smoothly, check whether indicator lights 45 and 47 have gone out
☞ Let the engine run at idling speed for about 2 minutes
☞ Have a malfunctioning indicating instrument immediately replaced
NOTICE: In order to avoid damage to the starter, do not stop the engine and
immediately start it again.
☞ After stopping the engine, wait 10 seconds before starting it again.
IMPORTANT
When the starter is switched on, all indicator lights on the indicating instrument
illuminate briefly. – indicator light check!
IMPORTANT
Have a malfunctioning indicating instrument replaced by an authorized
service center.
3-30 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Starting the engine
I IMPORTANT
0 II
P III Ensure that the preparations for starting the engine have been made
- see Preparing to start the engine on page 3-30.
72 Preheating start switch 72 is located on the control lever console on the right.
☞ Turn the starting key to position 1 (preheating)
Fig. 61 : Preheating start switch
➥ The following warning and indicator lights must illuminate briefly
45 46 47 (indicator light check!)
➥ Engine oil pressure indicator light 47
➥ Indicator light 46 if the parking brake is applied
➥ Indicator light 45 (alternator)
IMPORTANT
Preheating time depends on the outside temperature.
Reference values: Up to 0 °C (+32 °F) about 10 seconds
Fig. 62 : Indicator lights Up to −10 °C (+14 °F) about 30 seconds
Up to −20 °C (−4 °F) about 50 seconds
At very low temperatures, or if the battery is low, repeat the preheating
procedure before turning the starting key to position 3.
☞ Press the accelerator pedal through about 1/4 of its travel

☞ Turn the starting key to position 3 and hold it until the engine runs
☞ Release the starting key
• Check that the following indicator lights have gone out:
➥ Engine oil pressure indicator light 47
➥ Indicator light 45 (alternator)
IMPORTANT
If the indicator lights indicated above do not go out, stop the engine
immediately and have the reason checked by an authorized service center!
• Have a malfunctioning indicating instrument immediately replaced
IMPORTANT
In general, a battery delivers less energy in cold conditions.
Therefore ensure that the battery is always well charged.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-31

Operation
Avoiding running the engine under low-load conditions

NOTICE: The running performance of the engine can be negatively
affected if it runs at high speed and at less than 20 % of the load.
☞ Effects:
• Operating temperature is not reached
• Increased lube oil consumption
• Lube oil in exhaust system
• Engine contamination
• Blue smoke in exhaust
☞ Always run the diesel engine in regular operation at loads of over 20 %
3.21 Stopping the engine
NOTICE: In order to avoid heat accumulation and damage to the exhaust gas
0 I II turbocharger, do not stop the engine from full throttle!
P ☞ Let the engine run at idling speed for about 2 minutes and then stop it
III
NOTICE: In order to avoid damage to the starter, do not immediately start the
72 engine again after stopping it
☞ After stopping the engine, wait at least 10 seconds before starting it again
Fig. 63 : Stopping the engine
☞ Apply the parking brake to the last notch
☞ Turn the starting key (preheating start switch 72) to position 0
☞ Remove the starting key
3-32 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.22 Jump-starting the engine (external battery)

Safety instructions regarding external starting aids
WARNING
Explosion hazard. A frozen battery can explode during a jump-starting operation.
☞ Do not jump-start the engine if the battery is frozen.
☞ Dispose of the frozen battery in accordance with local environmental
regulations.
☞ Replace the battery
WARNING
Possible injury or damage to the machine due to incorrect jump-starting.
☞ Ensure that the jumper cables are rated for 12 V and the maximum
CCA rating of the battery.
☞ The cable clamping ends must be colored red for positive + terminal,
and black for the negative − terminal.
☞ To avoid sparking, the loader must not touch the jump-starting vehicle
when connected with jumper cables.
☞ Use a 12 V source, either in the form of another battery or a charger
equipped for jump-starting. Using higher or lower voltage sources can
damage the electrical system and potentially cause injury.
☞ To avoid short circuits, the jumper cable connected to the positive +
terminal of the starting battery must never be brought into contact with
electrically conductive vehicle parts.
☞ Route the jumper cables so they do not become entangled in rotating
components in the engine compartment.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-33

Operation
Providing external starting aid

☞ Drive the jump-starting vehicle close enough to the wheel loader so that the battery
jumper cables can reach to connect the two batteries
☞ Let the engine of the jump-starting vehicle run
Empty battery ☞ First connect one end of the red cable (+) to the + terminal of the discharged battery,
then connect the other end to the + terminal of the starting battery
12 V
☞ Connect one end of the black cable (−) to the – terminal of the starting battery
☞ Connect the other end of the black jump lead (−) onto a solid metal component fimly
installed on the engine block or onto the engine block itself. Do not connect it to the
negative terminal of the empty battery, as otherwise explosive gas emerging from
the battery can ignite if sparks are formed!
12 V ☞ Start the engine of the machine with the empty battery
Starting battery Once the engine has started:
☞ With the engine running, disconnect both jump leads in exactly the reverse order
(first remove the − terminal, then the + terminal) – this prevents sparking near the battery!
34001b710_05.eps
Fig. 64 : Starting aid with jump leads
3-34 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.23 Jump-starting the engine (external battery)

Safety instructions regarding external starting aids
WARNING
Explosion hazard due to jump-starting with a frozen battery
☞ Immediately replace the frozen battery by a new one.
Caution
Risk of short circuit if the wheel loader and the vehicle giving the jump start
have contact!
☞ The battery jumper cable connected to the positive + terminal of the starting
battery must never be brought into connection with electrically conductive
vehicle parts.
Caution
Risk of short circuit and sparks!
☞ The external power source must deliver 12 V; higher supply voltages
will damage the electrical system of the vehicles!
☞ Use only authorized battery jumper cables that conform to the safety
requirements and that are in perfect condition!
☞ Route the battery jumper cables so they cannot catch on rotating compo-
nents in the engine compartment!
Providing external starting aid

☞ Drive the jump-starting vehicle close enough to the loader so that the battery jumper
cables can reach to connect the two batteries
☞ Let the engine of the jump-starting vehicle run
☞ First connect one end of the red cable (+) to the + terminal of the discharged battery,
Empty battery then connect the other end to the + terminal of the starting battery
☞ Connect one end of the black cable (−) to the – terminal of the starting battery
12 V ☞ Connect the other end of the black cable (−) to a solid metal component fimly screwed
on the engine block or onto the engine block itself. Do not connect it to the negative
terminal of the empty battery, as otherwise explosive gas emerging from the battery
can ignite if sparks are formed!
☞ Start the engine of the machine with the empty battery
Once the engine has started:

12 V ☞ With the engine running, disconnect both jump leads in exactly the reverse order
(first the – terminal, then the + terminal). This prevents sparking near the battery!
Starting battery
Fig. 65 : Starting aid with battery jumper cables

34001b710_05.eps
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-35

Operation
3.24 Before machine operation

Special instructions for machine travel on public roads
The machine is subject to the:
• Applicable legal regulations of your country
• and to the requirements specified in the machine documentation
• Only the equipment items (attachments) listed in the General Certification for
Vehicles (Germany) or in the machine documentation are admissible for driving
on public roads!
• Also observe the footnotes/instructions in Attachments with certified material
densities on page 1-5
• In addition, observe the applicable national regulations relevant to accident
prevention, for example the UVV regulations for accident prevention of the
German social insurance against occupational accidents.
3-36 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Transport position of standard bucket on public roads
A IMPORTANT
When traveling on public roads with the telescopic loader, hitch the standard
bucket the other way round on the transport hooks inside the bucket. To do this:
☞ Empty the bucket and remove it from the quickhitch lowering it parallel to the ground
- see Setting down a standard bucket with mechanical locking (standard) on page 3-77
- see Removing a standard bucket with electric unlocking (option) on page 3-79
☞ Install transport hooks A on the inside of the bucket
B
☞ Use transport hooks A inside the standard bucket to pick it up with the quickhitch and
safely lock it
- see Picking up a standard bucket with mechanical locking (standard) on page 3-76
- see Installing a standard bucket with electric locking (option) on page 3-78
☞ Fully retract telescopic boom B
- see Operating the telescopic boom on page 3-73
☞ Stop the engine
200 mm ☞ Apply the parking brake
☞ Mount parts on the machine (front-edge protection of bucket, light strip or additional
C clearance lights – if necessary, and if fitted on the machine depending on the legal
regulations of your country) as required by national road traffic regulations
☞ Raise the loader unit until red marks C on the lift frame and the bulkhead are aligned
➥ With both marks C aligned, ground clearance for transport in connection with the
standard bucket and standard tires is about 200 mm (7.9 in).
☞ Lock the control lever (loader unit) and the 3rd control circuit
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd control circuit
Fig. 66 : Bucket transport position (standard) on page 3-39
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and electrical locking of 3rd control circuit lever
(option) on page 3-40
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the bucket, neither tilt it in nor tilt it out as you pick it up!
☞ Align the bucket parallel to the ground in transport position
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-37

Operation
Functional check of all control elements

• - see Checking the steering system on page 3-41
• - see Braking with the brake/inching pedal on page 3-46
• - see Machine lights on page 3-55
• - see Operating and locking the 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard) on page 3-66
or
- see Operating and locking the 3rd control circuit (electrical, option) on page 3-67
• - see Signaling system on page 3-57
• - see Washer system on page 3-61
3-38 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd control circuit (standard)
WARNING
10
Accident hazard. Unlocked control levers 10 (joystick) or 11
(3rd control circuit) can cause unintentional movements of the telescopic
boom. Possible loss of machine control.
☞ Before leaving the seat and before machine travel on public roads:
• Lock control lever 10 (loader unit) against unintentional operation
• Lock control lever 11 (3rd control circuit/quickhitch) against unintentional
operation
☞ After installing an attachment on the quickhitch, always secure the
11 3rd control circuit against unintentional operation
☞ Secure control lever 10 (loader unit)

• Push control lever 10 down vertically in neutral position
A
➥ The control lever is locked in this position and can no longer be moved
➥ The loader unit is secured against unintentional operation
☞ Lock the 3rd control circuit
Fig. 67 : Lock for control levers • Unscrew lock sleeve A on control lever 11 (3rd control circuit) clockwise out of the
thread until it is pulled down by spring action
• Move control lever 11 (3rd control circuit) to the middle position, release the lock
sleeve
➥ Control lever 11 is locked in this position
➥ The 3rd control circuit is secured against unintentional operation
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-39

Operation
Lock for loader unit control lever and electrical locking of 3rd control circuit lever (option)
The function of switch 89 on the control lever is described as seen in travel direction!
WARNING
Accident hazard. An unlocked control lever 10 (joystick) can cause uninten-
tional movements of the telescopic boom. Possible loss of machine control.
☞ Before leaving the machine and before machine travel on public roads,
10 secure control lever 10 (loader unit) against unintentional operation
WARNING
Accident hazard. When working with attachments without hydraulic functions,
unintentionally actuating the switch 89 on the control lever (3rd control circuit)
B A
can unlock the attachment from the quickhitch!
89 ☞ Lock the 3rd control circuit when working with attachments without hydraulic
functions
63
A
☞ Secure control lever 10 (loader unit)
B • Push control lever 10 down vertically in neutral position
Fig. 68 : Locking the control levers/3rd control circuit ➥ The control lever is locked in this position and can no longer be moved
(option)
➥ The loader unit is secured against unintentional operation
☞ Lock the 3rd control circuit
• Slide the lock in switch 63 downward and press the switch to position A
at the same time
➥ The 3rd control circuit is disabled.
3-40 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.25 Steering system
IMPORTANT
The steering system is only operational when the engine is running!
The machine can still be steered if the diesel engine or the pump drive
breaks down – emergency steering feature.
Turning the steering wheel requires greater effort! Take this into account
especially when towing the machine!
☞ Adapt the towing speed to the modified steering behavior!
☞ Use a towing bar!
➥ - see Towing the machine on page 3-117
Checking the steering system

WARNING
Accident hazard due to steering system failure.
The steering system is a safety element and must always be checked for leaks
and correct function before starting machine travel!
☞ Check for leaks daily, however every 10 operating hours at the latest
☞ Check for correct function daily, however every 10 operating hours at the
latest
☞ Functional check of steering system

• With the engine running, turn the steering wheel to the left and right
☞ Check and if necessary, synchronize the track (synchronization)
of the wheels of the front and rear axles - see Wheel synchronization on page 3-42
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-41

Operation
Wheel synchronization
If the wheels on both axles do not run in the same track, proceed as follows:
WARNING
An unsynchronized steering system can result in unusual handling during
machine travel on public roads.
☞ Synchronize the steering system as described before machine travel on
public roads
☞ At low travel speed, slowly turn the steering wheel to the left and right as far as it will
go and try turning it even farther in the end position for a few seconds (as for turning)
☞ Turn the steering wheel rapidly back to straight-ahead position
☞ Contact your Wacker Neuson service center if this does not synchronize the wheels
3.26 Differential lock

Switching the differential lock ON and OFF
IMPORTANT
A differential lock neutralizes the compensating effect of the differential;
in other words, traction is distributed evenly to the front and rear wheels.
• Both the front and the rear axle of the machine are fitted with a
self-locking differential
• The lock value is 45 % for each axle. The differential is locked
automatically and cannot be switched on or off by the operator!
3.27 Accelerator pedal

Speed control with the accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal 6 controls the travel speed as follows:
• Press the accelerator pedal down ➥ Travel speed is increased
• Release the accelerator pedal slowly ➥ Travel speed is reduced
6 • Release the accelerator pedal fully ➥ Hydrostatic braking
IMPORTANT
Speed depends on the speed range selected with the switch
Fig. 69 : Accelerator pedal
3-42 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.28 Manual throttle (option)

Engine speed regulation with manual throttle
Manual throttle G is located on the side console on the right.
IMPORTANT
B
The manual throttle is especially useful for operating hydraulic attachments
which need a continuous supply of hydraulic oil. Travel speed must be set
with the brake/inching pedal or with the low-speed control (option).
G A
WARNING
Fig. 70 : Manual throttle (option)
Accident hazard! Machine travel on public roads in a controlled
manner is not possible with manual throttle lever G!
☞ Use the manual throttle during work operation only!
☞ Before traveling on public roads:
• Move the manual throttle lever G to idling speed position B
• Set the engine speed with the accelerator pedal only
WARNING
Accident hazard! The machine accelerates in an uncontrolled manner
if the travel direction switch is actuated at preselected engine speed!
☞ Actuate the forward-reverse control only if the brake/inching pedal is
pressed or if the manual throttle lever is in neutral position
WARNING
Accident hazard! In an emergency situation, immediately press the
brake/inching pedal and push the manual throttle lever G forward to the limit B!
Furthermore, reset the manual throttle lever Gto the limit B before starting the
diesel engine again!
Function
☞ Preselect the engine speed as follows:
• Press the brake/inching pedal to the inching range - see Parking brake on page 3-47
• Preselect the travel direction - see Changing direction (forward/reverse) on page 3-50
• Set the required engine speed with the manual throttle lever
➥ A = full speed (maximum engine speed)
➥ B = idling speed (minimum engine speed)
• Slowly release the brake/inching pedal
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-43

Operation
3.29 Low-speed control (option)

Setting the travel speed with the low-speed control
The travel speed can be set continuously with control lever H of the low-speed control.
This function is especially useful for operation of hydraulically driven attachments
(rotary broom, rotary hoe, for example) in order to ensure continuous travel speed.
Maximum travel speed depends on the speed range selected.
Control lever H is located laterally on the side console on the right
WARNING
Risk of death. Accident hazard.
There is a risk of death when leaving the machine with the low-speed control
switched on at the same time.
☞ Never leave the machine during machine operation!
WARNING
In an emergency situation, immediately press the brake/inching pedal and
push control lever H backward to the limit B!
WARNING
In order to avoid accident hazard, push control lever H backward to the limit
B before starting the diesel engine again!
☞ Select the travel direction

- see Changing direction (forward/reverse) on page 3-50
A ☞ Select a speed range
H
☞ Set constant engine speed with the accelerator pedal or the manual throttle (option)
☞ Select the required travel speed. To do this: move control lever H toward A
B
☞ Stop the wheel loader. To do this: move control lever H to the limit B
➥ Limit A – maximum speed
➥ Limit B – machine is at a standstill
Fig. 71 : Low-speed control (option)
3-44 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.30 Brake/inching pedal

Specific information on brake/inching pedal operation
Brake/inching pedal 33 is located on the left in the machine.
The brake/inching pedal is used for two functions:
• Inching – engine speed does not change, however travel speed is reduced
to increase the output of the operating hydraulics
33 • Brakes
WARNING
Collision hazard. The brake lights at the rear of the machine only illuminate
if the inching pedal is pressed to actuate the braking system. The hydraulic
braking effect alone does not cause the brake lights to illuminate.
Fig. 72 : Brake/inching pedal ☞ Ensure that persons in the job site (especially persons behind the machine)
are aware that the brake lights do not illuminate if the hydraulic braking
effect is used.
WARNING
Accident hazard! Dirt and objects in the area of the brake/inching pedal
cause the pedal to get stuck and result in brake malfunctions!
☞ Keep the brake/inching pedal clean and remove all objects in the area
of the pedal
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-45

Operation
Braking with the brake/inching pedal
Caution
The machine can move uncontrolledly. Without applying any additional force to
the brake/inching pedal, the machine possibly moves on a slope. This braking
33
effect is achieved is achieved in addition to the automatic hydraulic braking
effect by pressing the pedal.
☞ Press brake/inching pedal 33 down with force until the braking effect is felt
NOTICE: Before driving downhill, select the “Turtle” speed range and use the brake
Fig. 73 : Brake/inching pedal pedal to support the braking effect of the drive. This avoids damage to the drive and/or the
diesel engine due to excessive speed (intermittent braking)!
☞ Reduce engine speed: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
☞ Reduce the travel speed with the brake/inching pedal
☞ Before starting machine travel, press brake/inching pedal 33 down to check whether
• After a maximum of half the pedal travel there is a firm resistance to be felt
• The brake lights illuminate
☞ Look in the rearview mirror before starting machine travel
☞ Press the brake/inching pedal down with force at slow speed and check the braking
effect
Inching with the brake/inching pedal

☞ Press down the brake/inching pedal 33
➥ In the inching range of the brake pedal (pedal pressed lightly), the pedal can be
used like a car’s clutch. The propulsion system is no longer supplied with hydraulic
oil which means that the entire engine output is available to the operating hydraulics
and that the loader unit can be raised more quickly.
3-46 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.31 Parking brake

General instructions regarding the parking brake
The parking brake is located to the right of the operator seat.
IMPORTANT
A starting interlock prevents the machine from starting even with the parking
brake slightly applied.
Selecting the travel direction with the switch (fig. 36/54) is not possible
unless parking brake 15 is released completely. Applying the parking brake
automatically cancels the selection of forward/reverse driving direction (drive)
and activates neutral.
Applying the parking brake
IMPORTANT
Parking brake 15 may only be applied in an emergency during machine travel,
if the machine cannot be braked with the service brake.
☞ Bear in mind that the brake lights do not illuminate when the parking brake
is applied.
☞ In normal operation only use brake/inching pedal 31/33 as a service brake
Preventing the machine from rolling away

46 P ☞ Pull lever 15 up to the last notch
A ➥ Indicator light 32/46 illuminates
15 ➥ The engine can be started
➥ Selection of forward/reverse driving direction (drive)
is automatically cancelled and neutral activated
☞ Secure the machine with wheel chocks
➥ - see Putting the machine out of operation on page 3-51
Fig. 74 : Applying and releasing the parking brake Releasing the parking brake
☞ Pull lever 15 up slightly
☞ Press button A.
☞ Move lever 15 down as far as it will go
➥ Indicator light 32/46 goes out
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-47

Operation
3.32 Starting machine travel

Important information on starting machine travel
The machine has two speed ranges (see table).
Select the speed range with switch 60 (see switch panel at the front right on the instrument
panel)
Caution
The machine can move uncontrolledly. Without applying any additional force to
the brake/inching pedal, the machine possibly moves on a slope. This braking
effect is achieved is achieved in addition to the automatic hydraulic braking
effect by pressing the pedal.
☞ Press brake/inching pedal fig. 31/33 down with force until the braking effect
is felt
NOTICE: Before driving downhill, select the “Turtle” speed range and use the brake
pedal to support the braking effect of the drive. This avoids damage to the drive and/or the
diesel engine due to excessive speed (intermittent braking)!
Reduce the travel speed with the brake/inching pedal
3-48 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Selecting a speed range and starting machine travel

☞ Set the travel direction to neutral with push button 78 (standard) or 87 (option)
80 ☞ Select the turtle or hare speed range. To do this: press switch 60
to positions A or B
86
78 Symbol Meaning Recommended
Used for work involving short loading
87 Speed range A
cycles; in other words, a rapid succession
0 – 6 kph (20 kph)
of loading and unloading operations,
0 – 3.73 mph (12.43 mph)
60 for example onto a truck, and for work
0 – 7 kph (option 30 kph)
requiring precise speed adjustment,
0 – 4.35 mph (18.64 mph)
A for example rotary broom applications
Speed range B = 0 – 20 kph
B (0 – 12.43 mph)
For long-haul travel
Speed range B = 0 – 30 kph
Fig. 75 : Selecting a speed range (0 – 18.64 mph) (option)
IMPORTANT
The travel direction can only be selected if parking brake 15 is completely
released.
☞ Release parking brake 15

☞ Select the travel direction with switch 80 (standard) or 86 (option)
➥ See table Function on page 3-50 (standard) or (option)
☞ Gradually press down the accelerator pedal
➥ Machine moves off
☞ Test the brakes at low speed
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-49

Operation
Changing direction (forward/reverse)
81 1 80 WARNING
79 Accident hazard! Changing direction (reversing operation)
at high speed causes the machine to brake abruptly.
☞ Reduce engine speed before changing direction
2
78 ☞ Brake the machine to walking pace with the brake/inching pedal
☞ Select a new travel direction with switch 80 (standard) or 86 (option)

Function Operation Effect
☞ Press switch 80 (standard) ➥ Indicator light 81 illuminates
83 upward 1
Forward travel
82 86 ☞ Press switch 86 (option) ➥ Arrow 82 illuminates
upward 1
1 87 ☞ Press switch 80 (standard) ➥ Indicator light 79 illuminates
downward 2
Reverse travel
☞ Press switch 86 (option) ➥ Arrow 83 illuminates
2 downward 2
☞ Press push button 78 (standard) ➥ Indicator lights 79 and 81 go
Neutral out
☞ Press push button 87 (option) ➥ Arrows 82 and 83 go out
Fig. 76 : Selecting a travel direction
3-50 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.33 Putting the machine out of operation

Stopping/parking the machine
Caution
The machine can move unintentionally. To avoid unintentional movement of
the machine once it has been parked:
☞ Use the parking brake to park the machine safely and to prevent it rolling
away - see Parking brake on page 3-47.
☞ In addition to the parking brake, secure the machine by placing chocks
under the downhill sides of the wheels!
☞ Stop the machine with service brake 31/33
☞ Move the machine to neutral with push button 34/63 on the control lever
☞ Apply the parking brake - see Parking brake on page 3-47
☞ Lower the telescopic boom. To do this:
• Push control lever (loader unit) 34/10 forward out of neutral
• Lower the bucket to the ground so that the cutting edge is flat with the ground.
To do this: push control lever 34/10 to the left or right - see Setting down a standard
bucket with mechanical locking (standard) on page 3-77
☞ Stop the engine (- see Stopping the engine on page 3-32)
After operation at full power:
☞ Allow the engine to run on for a while so that the temperature can stabilize
☞ Stop the engine. To do this:
• Turn the starting key to “0” and remove it
☞ Lock the doors after leaving the cabin
On slopes:
☞ In addition to the parking brake, secure the machine by placing chocks under the
downhill sides of the wheels!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-51

Operation
3.34 Load stabilizer (option)

General instructions regarding the load stabilizer function
During machine travel over longer distances, off-road or on public roads, the load
stabilizer dampens the movements of the loader unit and avoids pitching movements of
67 the machine. This increases drive comfort and safety.
A WARNING
Accident hazard! During machine travel on public roads, the machine may
B become unstable if the load stabilizer is not switched on.
Fig. 77 : Switch for load stabilizer (option) ☞ Always set switch 67 to position B during machine travel on public roads
IMPORTANT
In order not to impair the load stabilizer function in transport position of the
telescopic boom, do not retract the tilt cylinder to the limit!
• Briefly reduce the pressure on the tilt cylinder limit
IMPORTANT
The load stabilizer influences the hose burst valve. Switching on the load
stabilizer automatically switches off the hose burst valve (load-retaining valve).
If a hose or pipe bursts, this valve secures the system and prevents the
telescopic boom from being lowered or tilted out without being braked
- see “Hose burst valve” safety feature on page 3-116.
3-52 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
Switching the load stabilizer ON and OFF

Switch 67 is located on the side console on the right
50 IMPORTANT
Switch on the load stabilizer only in transport position of the loader unit!
67 The loader unit yields easily with the load stabilizer switched on, making
it difficult to perform any precise lifting movements.
A • Switch off the load stabilizer during pallet forks operation
B
IMPORTANT
Fig. 78 : Switch for load stabilizer (option) Depending on the load, the loader unit can rise or go down slightly as you
switch on the load stabilizer!
Function Work operation

☞ Press switch 67 to position A
➥ Indicator light 50 on the instrument
OFF In general for heavy-duty work,
panel goes out
for example picking up excavated
(A) ➥ The load stabilizer is switched off material
➥ The hose burst valve (option) is
switched on
☞ Press switch 67 to position B
➥ Indicator light 50 on the instrument For machine travel on public
ON panel illuminates roads, for lighter work with the
(B) ➥ Load stabilizer is switched on loader unit and for light off-road
➥ The hose burst valve (option) is transport
switched off
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-53

Operation
3.35 Backup warning system (option)

Backup warning system feature
In certain countries, a backup warning system is mandatory. Backup warning system A
consists of a signal transmitter fitted at the rear of the cabin. The signal transmitter gener-
ates an acoustic signal when shifting into reverse. The acoustic level is about 103 dB (A)
at a distance of 1 m (3 ft) and at a frequency of 2800 Hz.
WARNING
Accident hazard when reversing carelessly
☞ Do not rely on backup warning system A only!
☞ Ensure that nobody is within the danger zone
of the machine when changing the travel direction.
A
IMPORTANT
In certain countries, a backup warning system is mandatory.
Fig. 79 : Backup warning system (option)
3.36 Electric connection – front socket (option)

The machine can be equipped with a 4-pole front socket. Switch 75 on the right on
the instrument panel switches electric power supply on or off for electrically operated
attachments such as a spray water pump for a rotary broom.
69
Function Work operation
➥ Power supply at the socket is switched on
A ON Press switch 69 to position B
➥ Indicator light in switch illuminates
B ➥ Power supply is switched OFF
OFF Press switch 69 to position A
➥ Indicator light goes out
Fig. 80 : Front socket (option)
3-54 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.37 Machine lights

Machine lights operation
The switch panel of the light system is located on the side console on the right.
49 Side marker lights

☞ Press switch 62 to the ➥ Indicator light in push button
ON
1st position B illuminates
☞ Press switch 62 down ➥ Indicator light in switch goes out
OFF
to position A
62
Low beam
☞ Press switch 62 to the ➥ Indicator light in push button
A ON 2nd position B illuminates
B ☞ Move lever 31 to position II
OFF ☞ Press switch 62 to position A ➥ Indicator light in switch goes out
IMPORTANT
Only the side marker lights stay lit if the starter is switched off (with low beam
switched on) – key in preheating start switch 36/72 in position 0!
I
II
High beam
☞ Press switch 62 to the ➥ Indicator light (blue) 46 illuminates
ON 2nd position B
☞ Move lever 31 to position I
31 34200b0312.eps
☞ Move lever 31 to position II ➥ Indicator light (blue) 46 goes out
OFF
Fig. 81 : Light system ➥ Low beam illuminates
Headlight flasher
☞ Briefly pull lever 31 fully up ➥ Indicator light (blue) 46 illuminates
ON
(beyond position II)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-55

Operation
Working lights operation
WARNING
Accident hazard! Switch off the working lights to avoid dazzling motorists on
public roads!
☞ Do not switch on the working lights during machine travel on public roads
☞ When operating the machine, only switch on the working lights when no
one can be blinded by them
Front and/or rear working lights (option)

☞ Press switch 68 to position B ➥ Indicator light in push button
ON
illuminates
OFF ☞ Press switch 68 to position A ➥ Indicator light in switch goes out
2 front working lights (option)
ON
68 66 illuminates
OFF ☞ Push switch 68 to position A ➥ Indicator light in switch goes out
2 rear working lights (option)
ON ☞ Press push button 66 briefly ➥ Indicator light in switch illuminates
A
OFF ☞ Press push button 66 briefly ➥ Indicator light in switch goes out
B
Fig. 82 : Working light switches
Interior light operation
Interior light
ON ☞ Press switch 3 to the left or right
OFF ☞ Move switch 3 to the middle position
Fig. 83 : Switch for interior light
3-56 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.38 Signaling system

Turn indicator operation
42 Turn indicators
RIGHT ☞ Push lever 31 forward R ➥ Indicator light 42 flashes
41
LEFT ☞ Pull lever 31 to the rear L ➥ Indicator light 42 flashes
IMPORTANT
Indicator light 41 flashes during trailer operation.
R
IMPORTANT
34200b0313.eps A rapidly flashing indicator light 42 is a sign that one of the indicator lights is
L
not working.
31
• Actuate the turn indicators, and check both the front and the rear turn
Fig. 84 : Turn indicators indicators to see which one is not working.
• Replace all malfunctioning bulbs.
• If the malfunction is not repaired by replacing a bulb, get in touch with your
dealer to check and repair the malfunction in the turn indicator system.
Hazard warning system operation
Hazard warning system

☞ Press switch for hazard ➥ The indicator light in the switch and
ON warning system 73 to indicator light 42 on the instrument
notched position panel both flash
☞ Release switch for hazard ➥ The indicator light in the switch and
warning system 73 from indicator light 42 on the instrument
OFF
notched position by panel both go out
applying slight pressure
73
Fig. 85 : Switch for hazard warning system
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-57

Operation
3.39 Rotating beacon (option)

Rotating beacon operation
Rotating beacon (option)

ON
illuminates
71 OFF ☞ Press switch 71 to position A ➥ Indicator light in switch goes out
IMPORTANT
In the Federal Republic of Germany, § 52 StVZO (German traffic regulations)
A requires you not to switch on the rotating beacon on public roads unless the
road is within the machine’s working range and the machine represents an
B obstruction to the normal flow of traffic when it is in work operation.
Fig. 86 : Switch for rotating beacon
3-58 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.40 Cabin heating and ventilation

Heating and ventilation system operation
IMPORTANT
The machine heater can be set to 2 operating modes:
• Ventilation, fresh air
• Heating
• The air flow is directed to the front window via defroster vent 31/36,
and to the leg room via both vents 31/5. The leg room nozzles can
be adjusted and closed separately.
The ventilation switch and the rotary switch for heating are located on the right on the side
A
console.
B
Ventilation (fresh air)
1st speed ☞ Press switch 65 down one step B ➥ Fan runs in 1st speed
65 2nd speed ☞ Press switch 65 down two steps B ➥ Fan runs in 2nd speed
OFF ☞ Press switch 65 to position A ➥ Fan OFF
Heating
☞ Turn rotary switch 75 to the left Cold
75 Cold ☞ Turn rotary switch 75 to the right Warm
Warm
Fig. 87 : Ventilation/heating switch
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-59

Operation
3.41 Air conditioning (option)

Air conditioning operation
During the hot season, the air conditioning system supplies cool and dehumidified air to
the cabin via the vent nozzles in the cabin roof.
NOTICE: In order to avoid functional errors and possible loss of the refrigerant:
26 ☞ Run the air conditioning system once a month
☞ This prevents the seals in the compressor from drying and becoming brittle
☞ Check the V-belt tension and clean the condenser
☞ – see chapter 5 “Air conditioning (option): maintenance” on page 5-38
☞ The air conditioning system may only be repaired, serviced and filled with refrigerant
by a qualified Wacker Neuson technician
Fig. 88 : Air conditioning rotary switch The rotary switch for the air conditioning system is located on the left next to the operator
seat
Air conditioning operation Cooling

☞ Turn rotary switch 26 to position 1 Low
☞ Turn rotary switch 26 to position 2 Medium
☞ Turn rotary switch 26 to position 3 High
☞ Turn rotary switch 26 to position 0 OFF
IMPORTANT
Close the door and the windows to achieve best air conditioning results.
IMPORTANT
The heating and ventilation system can be used in addition to the air
conditioning system!
• - see Heating and ventilation system operation on page 3-59
3-60 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b330.fm

Operation
3.42 Washer system

Wiper controls
Front wiper
☞ Turn rotary switch 59 on lever 31 ➥ Front wiper is on
OFF
to position 0
ON
☞ Turn rotary switch 59 on lever 31 ➥ Front wiper returns
to position 1 to base position
34200b0313.eps
59 31
Fig. 89 : Front wiper switch
Washer pump for front and rear window

31
A ON ☞ Press and hold push button 58 on lever 31 (A)
OFF ☞ Release push button 58
34200b0313.eps
58
Fig. 90 : Washer pump switch
Rear wiper
A
ON ☞ Press switch A/1 ➥ Rear wiper is on
OFF ☞ Press switch A/0 ➥ Rear wiper returns to base position
Fig. 91 : Rear wiper switch
Washer system reservoir

Tank filler inlet 34 is located on the left in the front cover (steering system)
IMPORTANT
34 Add clean tap water only!
Add a suitable cleaning agent if required.
In winter: add antifreeze for washer systems to the water.
Refer to the antifreeze instructions for further information on concentrations
– see chapter 5 “Fluids and lubricants” on page 5-59.
Fig. 92 : Washer system reservoir
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b330.fm 3-61

Operation
Operation
3.43 Safe load indicator for telescopic boom

Safety instructions regarding the safe load indicator
The telescopic loader is equipped with an electronic load indicator for continuously
monitoring weight changes on the rear axle during operation.
Visible and acoustic signals warn the operator of critical loads on the telescopic boom
that might cause the machine to tip over to the front.
Critical side loads however are not monitored, that is, the operator is not warned in this
case!
WARNING
Loss of machine control. Accident hazard and injury. A malfunctioning
safe load indicator or working at more than 100 % of the safe work load
can cause the machine to tip over.
☞ Work carefully
☞ Adapt your travel speed and loads to the terrain
☞ Read the maximum permissible loads off the load diagram
☞ Check the safe load indicator once a day
☞ A flashing indicator and a continuous acoustic signal warn of loads
exceeding 81 % – reduce the load or retract the telescopic boom
☞ Do not rely only on the safe load indicator
WARNING
Loss of machine control. Accident hazard and injury.
At an extreme steering angle (steering wheel turned to the limit, for example)
and/or lateral loads on the wheels of the rear axle, the safe load indicator can
be negatively affected and can emit the wrong values.
☞ Before picking up or setting down a load, set the steering system (wheels)
to the straight-ahead position
☞ Take care not to touch any obstacles with the outside or inside of the
wheels.
3-62 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Safe load indicator display unit (overview)

c The LEDs a, b and c indicate the load effective on the telescopic boom – in percent of the
safe work load.
b a 3 – 4 green LEDs – indication of loads between 45 and 85 % of the safe work load
b 1 yellow LED – indication of loads up to 100 % of the safe work load
a
c 1 red LED – indication of loads up to 110 % of the safe work load
d 1 green LED to signal readiness
e Push button (TEST) for checking the system
e
Measures to be taken if ...
d • Green LED d illuminates?
Fig. 93 : Safe load indicator ➥ OK; load indicator is ready
• Green LEDs a illuminate?
➥ OK; load is between 45 and 90 % of the safe work load
• Yellow LED b illuminates in addition to the green LEDs a?
➥ Work with caution; the load is between 85 and 100 % of the safe work load
• Green LEDs a and yellow LED b flash, the acoustic signal sounds?
➥ Work with extreme caution! 100 % of the safe work load is reached according to
the load diagram!
• Red LED c illuminates?
➥ TIPPING HAZARD! Retract the telescopic boom immediately to reduce the load!
➥ The load is between 100 and 110 % of the safe work load!
• The complete indicator flashes, the acoustic signal is given, although the TEST push
button has not been activated?
➥ The safe load indicator is malfunctioning, have it immediately checked and repaired
by a technician!
Functional check of the safe load indicator
IMPORTANT
The check can be performed at any time, even during operation.
☞ Proceed as follows:
• Press TEST push button e
All LEDs flash and the acoustic signal is given:
➥ OK
If the signal sounds uninterruptedly for 10 seconds and all diodes illuminate as well:
➥ System error; have the safe load indicator immediately checked and repaired by a
specialist!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-63

Operation
3.44 Overview of loader unit control lever (standard)

Control lever for the lift, tilt and push-out cylinders (standard)
WARNING
Possible loss of machine control. During machine travel on roads,
an unlocked control lever 10 (joystick) can be moved unintentionally
and cause unintentional machine movements.
☞ Before leaving the seat and during machine travel on public roads,
lock the control lever (joystick) against unintentional operation
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd con-
trol circuit (standard) on page 3-39!
D Desig-
Operation Function
nation
C 76
A A To the left Tilts in the attachment
77 B To the right Tilts out the attachment
B C Forward Lowers the telescopic boom
E
10 Fully forward Lowers the telescopic boom to float position
D
(2nd position) (option)
E Backward Raises the telescopic boom
76 Extends the telescopic boom
Fig. 94 : Control lever for telescopic boom
Push button
77 Retracts the telescopic boom
IMPORTANT
The control valve can be fitted with a float position (option). This is beneficial
when working with a rotary broom or snowplows and for grading in reverse.
3-64 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.45 Overview of loader unit control lever (option)

Control lever for the lift, tilt and push-out cylinders (option)
WARNING
Accident hazard due to unlocked control lever 10 or unlocked 3rd control
circuit. Can cause unintentional machine movements.
☞ Before leaving the operator seat, and during machine travel on public
roads, lock control lever 10 (joystick) and 3rd control circuit operation
against unintentional operation
- see Lock for loader unit control lever and electrical locking of 3rd control
circuit lever (option) on page 3-40.
D
Operation Function
B 84
C A To the left Tilts in the attachment
B To the right Tilts out the attachment
A C Forward Lowers the telescopic boom
85 Fully forward Lowers the telescopic boom to float position
E D
(2nd position) (option)
E Backward Raises the telescopic boom
B A
Switchable hydraulic pressure relief valve for
89 10 additional control circuit (additional function
84 Push button (option) “plus” for “powerflow")- see “plus powerflow”
Fig. 95 : Control levers for the loader unit and 3rd control operation (switchable pressure relief valve)
circuit (option) (option) on page 3-72
85 Switch (option) Retracts and extends the telescopic boom
• 3rd control circuit for locking/unlocking the
89 Switch (option) quickhitch
• For hydraulic attachment
IMPORTANT
As an option the control valve can be fitted with a float position. This is
beneficial when working with a rotary broom or snowplows and for grading
bulk material in reverse.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-65

Operation
3.46 Operating and locking the 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard)
Unlocking the control lever (standard)
The function of control lever 11 is described as seen in travel direction.
11
Unlocking the control lever (mechanical, standard)
O
☞ Pull lock sleeve A on control lever 11 ➥ The control lever is permanently

upward and turn it counterclockwise operational
into the thread ➥ 3rd control circuit is enabled
Z
☞ Pull lock sleeve A on control lever 11 ➥ The control lever is temporarily

A upward and hold it operational
➥ 3rd control circuit is enabled
Fig. 96 : Unlocking the control lever of the 3rd control

circuit (mechanical, standard)
Unlocking and locking attachments (standard)
IMPORTANT
O
11
The attachment locked in the quickhitch is automatically secured against
unintentional unlocking.
Z
An attachment can only be unlocked by pressing push button 61 and

moving control lever 11 at the same time (two-hand control).
61

A
Unlocking attachments (3rd control circuit) (mechanical, standard)
B ☞ Unlock the attachment. To do this: press ➥ The attachment on the quickhitch
push button 61 to position B and move is unlocked
Fig. 97 : Unlocking/locking attachments (standard)
control lever 11 forward to position O
at the same time
Locking attachments (3rd control circuit) (mechanical, standard)
☞ Lock the attachment. To do this: move ➥ The attachment is locked in the
control lever 11 backward to position Z quickhitch
Operation of hydraulic attachments (standard)

Operation of attachment (3rd control circuit) mechanical (standard)
☞ Move control lever 11 forward to ➥ Pressurizes the red hydraulic line on
position O the left and closes a multipurpose
bucket, for example
☞ Move control lever 11 backward to ➥ Pressurizes the blue hydraulic line on
position Z the right and opens a multipurpose
bucket, for example
3-66 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.47 Operating and locking the 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)
Unlocking the 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)
63 Unlocking the 3rd control circuit (electric operation, standard)

A ☞ Slide the lock in switch 63 downward ➥ 3rd control circuit is enabled
and press switch 63 to position B
B
at the same time
Fig. 98 : Unlocking the quickhitch (option)
Unlocking and locking attachments (option)
61 IMPORTANT
A The attachment locked in the quickhitch is automatically secured against
unintentional unlocking.
B
An attachment can only be unlocked by pressing push button 61 and switch
89 at the same time (two-hand control).
The function of switch 89 on control lever 10 is described as seen in travel direction.

Unlocking attachments (3rd control circuit) (electrical, option)
B A ☞ Unlock the attachment. To do this: press ➥ The attachment on the quickhitch
10 push button 61 to position B and press is unlocked
89 switch 89 to the right to position B at the
same time (side window on the right)
Fig. 99 : Operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)
Locking attachments (3rd control circuit) (electrical, option)
☞ Lock the attachment. To do this: ➥ The attachment is locked in the
press switch 89 to the left to quickhitch and automatically
position A (cabin door on the left) secured against unlocking
Operation of hydraulic attachments (option)

Operation of attachment (3rd control circuit) (electrical, option)
☞ Press switch 89 on control lever ➥ Pressurizes the red hydraulic line on
10 to the right to position B the left and opens a multipurpose
bucket, for example
☞ Press switch 89 on control lever ➥ Pressurizes the blue hydraulic line on
10 to the left to position A the right and closes a multipurpose
bucket, for example
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-67

Operation
3.48 Continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard)

Continuous operation is used for hydraulic movements/procedures over a longer period
of time or operation of hydraulic motors (rotary broom, for example) or for operation of
attachments with an integrated control valve adjusted to maximum oil flow, with an
unpressurized return.
WARNING
Crushing hazard. Injury hazard. Accident hazard.
H Attachments that are not locked on the quickhitch can tip over or fall off
unexpectedly.
☞ Before starting work, ensure that the attachment is safely locked onto the
quickhitch by means of the lock cylinder!
Fig. 100 : Checking the lock pins
☞ You must be able to see lock pins H on either side of the mounting holes
on the attachment
☞ Secure the 3rd control circuit after locking
- see Unlocking and locking attachments (standard) on page 3-66
Switching on continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard)

11 1 Connect the flexible lines of the 3rd
control circuit to the attachment see The hydraulic connection is established
A
page 3-91
2 Unlock control lever 11. To do this: pull The control lever is temporarily
Z
lock sleeve A on control lever upward operational

and hold it 3rd control circuit is enabled
3 Move control lever 11 backward to Continuous operation of 3rd control circuit
position Z and release lock sleeve A, is enabled
move the control lever back and The lock sleeve is pulled down by spring
forth slightly to ensure that it is safely action
Fig. 101 : Operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)
(mechanical, standard) engaged The control lever is locked in position Z
Switching off continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard)
1 Unlock control lever 11. To do this: pull The control lever is temporarily
lock sleeve A on control lever 11 operational
upward and hold it
Continuous operation of 3rd control circuit
is disabled
2 Move control lever 11 to the middle The lock sleeve is pulled down by spring
position and release lock sleeve A action
The control lever is locked in the middle
position
IMPORTANT
Start interlock of diesel engine in continuous operation!
For safety reasons, the diesel engine cannot be started again after it has been
stopped with continuous operation switched on. Continuous operation has to
be enabled again.
☞ Switch off continuous operation of the additional control circuit
☞ Start the diesel engine
☞ Switch on continuous operation again
.
3-68 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.49 Continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)

Continuous operation is used for hydraulic movements/procedures over a longer period
of time or operation of hydraulic motors (rotary broom, for example) or for operation of
attachments with an integrated control valve adjusted to maximum oil flow, with an
unpressurized return.
WARNING
Attachments that are not locked on the quickhitch can tip over or fall off
H
unexpectedly.
☞ Before starting work, ensure that the attachment is safely locked onto
the quickhitch by means of the lock cylinder!
☞ You must be able to see lock pins H on either side of the mounting
holes on the attachment
63 64 Switching on continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)

A 1 Connect the flexible lines of the 3rd
control circuit to the attachment see The hydraulic connection is established
B page 3-91
2 Unlock the 3rd control circuit.
To do this: slide the lock in switch
3rd control circuit is enabled
63 downward and press the switch
to position B at the same time
Fig. 103 : Operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option) 3 Slide the lock in switch 64 downward
and press the switch to position B at
is enabled
the same time
Switching off continuous operation of 3rd control circuit (electrical, option)
1 Press switch 64 to position A
is disabled
2 Lock the 3rd control circuit. To do this:
slide the lock in switch 63 downward 3rd control circuit is disabled and secured
and press the switch to position A at against unintentional operation
the same time
IMPORTANT
Start interlock of diesel engine in continuous operation!
For safety reasons, the diesel engine cannot be started again after it has been
stopped with continuous operation switched on. Continuous operation has to
be enabled again.
☞ Switch off continuous operation of the additional control circuit
☞ Start the diesel engine
☞ Switch on continuous operation again
.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-69

Operation
3.50 Emergency lowering of loader unit in case of diesel engine breakdown

Lowering or raising
The optional control lever is operated in the same way as the standard control lever.
C WARNING
Accident hazard, injury and machine damage!
Never switch on the load stabilizer (option) if the hose burst valve (option) is
enabled after a hose or pipe rupture!
E ➥ The telescopic boom is immediately lowered in an uncontrolled manner!
☞ Remove loads with a second machine if necessary.
☞ Contact an authorized service center.
10
☞ Lower the loader unit as follows:
Fig. 104 : Lowering the loader unit
• Ensure that no one is in the danger zone of the machine
• Apply the parking brake
• Slowly push the control lever forward C until the loader unit is fully lowered
• Release control lever 10
• Switch off the starter and remove the starting key
☞ Raise the loader unit as follows:
• Fasten lifting gear (crane) onto the loader unit
• Pull and hold control lever 10 backward E
• Raise the loader unit to transport position with the lifting gear
• Release control lever 10
IMPORTANT
Emergency lowering is only possible if the load stabilizer (option) is switched on.
☞ Switch on the load stabilizer for emergency lowering.
☞ Contact an authorized service center if the machine is not equipped with a
load stabilizer.
IMPORTANT
In case of diesel engine breakdown, have an authorized service center perform
checks and repair work
3-70 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.51 Pressure relief on the quick couplers and the quickhitch
IMPORTANT
The hydraulic system of the machine is still pressurized even when the engine
is not running! The hydraulic quick couplers can be released, however they
cannot be re-attached because the pressure in the hydraulic lines has not
been released. Therefore:
• Release the pressure in the sections of the system and hydraulic lines
that are to be opened before starting setup or repair work, for example
fitting/removing an attachment!

11
☞ Stop the engine but leave the starter switched on
O
☞ Perform a mechanical pressure relief (standard). To do this:

• Unlock control lever 11 (standard)
Z
• Pull lock sleeve A up and turn it counterclockwise into the thread

A • Move control lever 11 back and forth several times O/Z
➥ Pressure in hydraulic lines is released
☞ Perform an electrical pressure relief (option). To do this:
• Press and hold switch 89 in each of positions A and B for about 5 – 8 seconds
Fig. 105 : Mechanical pressure relief (standard)
➥ Pressure in hydraulic lines is released
☞ Switch off the starter and remove the starting key
☞ The quick couplers can be changed over
- see Connecting hydraulic lines to the machine on page 3-91
B A
89
Fig. 106 : Electrical pressure relief (option)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-71

Operation
3.52 “plus powerflow” operation (switchable pressure relief valve) (option)

The additional function “plus powerflow” is only used in connection with the “Additional
control circuit with additional function”!
If an attachment with an additional function is installed (for example a rotary broom)
that makes it impossible to raise and/or tilt in the loader unit, the additional function
“plus powerflow” can then be used for increasing the working pressure on the loader
unit by pressing pushbutton switch 84 . This makes it possible to operate the attachment
and the loader unit at the same time.
Note: Pressing the push button reduces the flow rate of the attachment.
☞ Operate as follows:
84 • Press and hold push button 84 before raising or tilting in the loader unit
• Raise and/or tilt in the loader unit
• Release push button 84
IMPORTANT
10 The machine is preset to an installed load of about 500 kg.

If heavier attachments are installed, the additional function “plus powerflow”
Fig. 107 : Push button “plus powerflow” (option)
cannot be used unless the pressure relief valve is adapted to the higher load.
In order to avoid damage to the hydraulic system, have the setting only
performed by an authorized service center!
The pressure relief valve is located behind the left access.

☞ Readjust as follows:
• Loosen lock nut ( 19 mm) on set screw A of the pressure relief valve
• Adjust set screw A (allen key 5 mm) according to the specified values
➥ Pressure reduction => turn set screw A counterclockwise
➥ Pressure increase => turn set scew A clockwise
• Tighten the lock nut on set screw A
A • Make a test run
Fig. 108 : Pressure relief valve “plus powerflow” (option) Readjustment values:
➥ Installed load: 500 kg/60 bar (1,102.31 lbs./857.4 psi) => preset
➥ Installed load: 1000 kg/80 bar (2,204.62 lbs./1,143.2 psi) => about 4 clockwise turns
➥ Installed load: 2000 kg/125 bar (4,409.25 lbs./1,786.25 psi) => about 8 clockwise turns
3-72 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.53 Operating the telescopic boom

Raising/extending the telescopic boom
WARNING
Tipping hazard! The maximum load is effective with the telescopic boom
fully extended and raised, or fully extended and horizontal. The machine
risks tipping over to the front and to the sides.
☞ Reduce the load immediately by retracting and lowering the telescopic
boom
☞ Bear in mind the safe load indicator
- see Safety instructions regarding the safe load indicator on page 3-62
☞ Raise the retracted telescopic boom to the required height. To do this:

• Pull control lever 10 backward E
10
10
Fig. 109 : Raising the loader unit (standard)
☞ Extend the telescopic boom. To do this:

• Press push button 76 (standard) or switch 85 (option) upward until the telescopic
boom is extended to the required length
76
10
85
10
Fig. 110 : Extending the telescopic boom (standard)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-73

Operation
Retracting/lowering the telescopic boom
WARNING
Tipping hazard! The safe work load can be exceeded when lowering the
loader unit with an extended telescopic boom! This can cause the machine
77 to tip over
10
☞ Always retract the telescopic boom before you lower it!
85 ☞ Retract the telescopic boom. To do this:

• Press push button 77 (standard) or switch 85 (option) downward until the telescopic
boom is fully retracted
10
Fig. 111 : Retracting the telescopic boom (standard)
☞ Lower the loader unit with a retracted telescopic boom. To do this:

C • Push control lever 10 forward C
10
10
Fig. 112 : Lowering the loader unit (option)
3-74 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.54 Equipping the machine with a standard bucket

Fields of application of the standard bucket
The standard bucket is mainly used for digging earth, and for loosening, picking up,
transporting and loading loose or solid materials.
- see Fields of application and using the wheel loader with an attachment on page 1-5
Machine travel on public roads with a full bucket is prohibited according to StVZO
(German road traffic regulations) - see Attachments with certified material densities on
page 1-5.
In addition, bear in mind the mandatory regulations relevant to accident prevention.
The machine may be used for applications with lifting gear only if the prescribed safety
devices are in place and functional.
These are for example:
• Safe possibilities of slinging and securing lifting gear (load hook)
– see chapter 2 “Applications with lifting gear” on page 2-7
• Load diagram!
Checking the mounting bore of the attachment
M
L WARNING
Wear or damage can have the result that catch bolt H is no longer aligned
with mounting bore L of the attachment. This can cause the attachment to
be released suddenly.
☞ Check the attachment and the lock before any use.
☞ Have a worn limit stop M of the attachment or a bent catch bolt H
replaced by an authorized service center.
Fig. 113 : Mounting bore of attachment
Removing the transport hooks

The transport hooks installed in the standard bucket must be removed before working
with the bucket.
☞ Remove transport hooks A as follows
• Remove the transport hooks
• Close the bores with the fastening screws of the hooks
A
Fig. 114 : Removing the transport hooks
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-75

Operation
Picking up a standard bucket with mechanical locking (standard)

If you are fitting or removing attachments with their own hydraulic functions – high-tilt
C 11 or side swing bucket, for example – you must follow the special information given in the
A 10
Operator’s Manual of the attachment.
Z
B
E WARNING
unexpectedly.
F ☞ You must be able to see lock pins H on either side of the mounting holes
on the attachment
H ☞ Secure the 3rd control circuit after locking
G
☞ Approach the machine to the attachment
☞ Lower loader unit F. To do this: press control lever 10 forward C
F ☞ Tilt quickhitch G forward. To do this: push control lever 10 to the right B
☞ Adjust the height of quickhitch G so that it is under catch hooks H of the attachment
H ☞ Drive the machine forward until quickhitch G is directly beneath catch hooks H of the
attachment
G ☞ Raise loader unit F until quickhitch G engages in catch hooks H of the attachment.
To do this: pull control lever 10backward E
☞ Fully tilt in quickhitch G. To do this: push control lever 10to the left A
☞ Secure the attachment with lock pins H of the quickhitch. To do this: pull control
lever 11 backward Z - see Unlocking and locking attachments (standard) on page 3-66
➥ Lock pin H engages in the mounting bores of the attachment
☞ Ensure that the attachment is safely locked with lock pins H
H
Fig. 115 : Pick up the attachment
3-76 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Setting down a standard bucket with mechanical locking (standard)
C WARNING
A 10
Crushing hazard. Attachments can tip or fall over if they are not lowered to
level ground.
☞ Position the attachment so that it will not tip over once it is unlocked
☞ Drive the machine with the empty attachment up to the drop-off position
☞ Tilt in quickhitch G. To do this: push control lever 10 to the left A
F ☞ Lower loader unit F until the attachment is about 5 – 10 cm (1.97 – 3.94 in)
above the ground. To do this: push control lever 10 forward C
G
Fig. 116 : Lowering and tilting in the attachment
C
☞ Unlock the 3rd control circuit. To do this: press push button 61 to position B
10
O
➥ The lock cylinder is unlocked

11
B ☞ Push control lever 11 (3rd control circuit) forward O
61 ➥ The attachment is unlocked
☞ Slightly tilt the quickhitch forward. To do this: push control lever 10 to the right B
A ☞ Lower the loader unit. To do this: push control lever 10 forward C
B ➥ Lower loader unit F until quickhitch G is no longer in the catch hooks
☞ Reverse the machine away from the attachment
Fig. 117 : Lower the attachment
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-77

Operation
Installing a standard bucket with electric locking (option)
C B
WARNING
A Crushing hazard. Injury hazard. Accident hazard.

E unexpectedly.
B A the quickhitch by means of the lock cylinder!
89 10 on the attachment
or side swing bucket, for example – you must follow the special information given in the
☞ Approach the machine to the attachment
F
☞ Lower loader unit E. To do this: press control lever 10 forward C
☞ Tilt quickhitch G forward. To do this: push control lever 10 to the right B
H
☞ Adjust the height of quickhitch G so that it is under catch hooks H of the attachment
G
☞ Drive the machine forward until quickhitch G is directly beneath catch hooks H of the
attachment
☞ Raise loader unit F until quickhitch G engages in catch hooks H of the attachment.
F To do this: pull control lever 10 backward E
☞ Fully tilt in quickhitch G. To do this: push control lever 10 to the left A
H ☞ Lock the attachment. To do this: press switch 89on control lever 10 to the left
to position A - see Unlocking and locking attachments (option) on page 3-67
➥ Lock pin H engages in the mounting bores of the attachment
G ☞ Ensure that the attachment is safely locked with lock pins H
☞ You must be able to see lock pins H on either side of the mounting holes on the
attachment
Fig. 118 : Pick up the attachment
3-78 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Removing a standard bucket with electric unlocking (option)
WARNING
Crushing hazard. Attachments can tip or fall over if they are not lowered to
level ground.
G ☞ Position the attachment so that it will not tip over once it is unlocked
☞ Drive the machine with the empty attachment up to the drop-off position
☞ Tilt in quickhitch G. To do this: push control lever 10 to the left A
C ☞ Lower the loader unit until the attachment is about 5 – 10 cm (1.97 – 3.94 in)
above the ground. To do this: push control lever 10 forward C
A
Fig. 119 : Lowering and tilting in the attachment
61 ☞ Unlock the 3rd control circuit. To do this:

• Press push button 61 to position B
A ➥ The lock cylinder is unlocked
B • Slide the lock in switch 63 downward and press switch 63 to position B at the same time
63 ➥ The 3rd control circuit is enabled and switch 89 on control lever 10 is functional
A ☞ Unlock the attachment. To do this: press switch 89 on control lever 10 to the right to
position B
B ➥ The attachment is unlocked
☞ Slightly tilt the quickhitch forward. To do this: push control lever 10 to the right B
C B ☞ Lower the loader unit. To do this: push control lever 10 forward C
10 ➥ Lower loader unit F until quickhitch G is no longer in the catch hooks
☞ Reverse the machine away from the attachment
B A
89
Fig. 120 : Lower the attachment
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-79

Operation
3.55 Working with the standard bucket

General safety instructions for working with the bucket
WARNING
Tipping hazard.
A malfunctioning safe load indicator or working at more than 100 % of the
safe work load can cause the machine to tip over.
☞ Check the safe load indicator once a day!
☞ With a load over 81 %, a flashing indicator and a continuous acoustic
signal, reduce the load or retract the telescopic boom.
• Bear in mind the safety instructions given in the following chapters before working
with the machine:
• Safety instructions on page 2-1,
• Designated use on page 2-2,
• Safety instructions regarding operation on page 2-4
• Never drive up to the edge of a pit from outside
• Never undermine the foundations of walls
• Operation of the machine by unauthorized personnel is prohibited!
• When working with the machine, look out for high-voltage cables, underground cables,
gas and water pipes!
• When using lifting gear such as pallet forks, comply with the load diagrams valid for
this machine
• The hydraulic system of the machine is still pressurized even when the engine is
not running! Release the pressure in the sections of the system and hydraulic lines
that are to be opened before starting setup or repair work, for example fitting/removing
a hydraulic attachment
- see Pressure relief on the quick couplers and the quickhitch on page 3-71
• If the telescopic loader is equipped with a load stabilizer (option):
• Switch off the load stabilizer before working with the telescopic boom – otherwise
it will yield very easily, making it difficult to perform any precise lifting movements
- see Load stabilizer (option) on page 3-52
• Do not perform any jerky movements with the control lever (joystick)
• Set down and pick up loads carefully at low diesel engine speed
• Before leaving the machine, lower the bucket to the ground, stop the diesel engine,
switch off the starter and remove the key
3-80 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Transport position of standard bucket in work operation
WARNING
Tipping hazard. During machine travel with a lifted and full bucket,
the machine can tip over when turning or traveling across a slope.
☞ Perform machine travel with an empty or loaded bucket in the lowest
possible position to keep the center of gravity as low as possible and to
prevent the machine from tipping over on a slope or in a turn.
☞ Tilt the bucket fully in.
☞ Raise the telescopic boom to transport position.
NOTICE: In order to avoid damage to the tires, do not perform machine travel
with the bucket fully tilted out!
☞ Tilt in the bucket and lower it to transport position
IMPORTANT
Machine travel on public roads with a bucket is prohibited in Germany!
• If the standard bucket is filled with material
• if the distance between the front edge of the bucket and the center
of the steering wheel is over 3500 mm (138 in) in transport position.
• if the control levers of the loader unit and of the 3rd control circuit are
not secured
☞ Install the standard bucket the other way round on the quickhitch
- see Transport position of standard bucket on public roads on page 3-37
Get informed on and follow the legal regulations of your country!
Loader unit operation - see Overview of loader unit control lever (standard) on page 3-64
A or - see Overview of loader unit control lever (option) on page 3-65
☞ Set the standard bucket to transport position as follows:
• Empty and tilt back the standard bucket B
• Raise the loader unit until both red marks D on the lift frame and the bulkhead are aligned
B
➥ Ground clearance C about 200 mm (7.87 in)
C • Cover the blade or teeth of the standard bucket across their entire width with the
tooth guard A provided
D
• Secure the loader unit control lever
(standard) on page 3-39
Fig. 121 : Transport position of standard bucket
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-81

Operation
Safety instructions regarding work with a full standard bucket
A Wrong WARNING
Accident hazard. Injury hazard.
When tilted in transport position, the standard bucket performs parallel
movements as the telescopic boom is raised and extended.
If the standard bucket is unintentionally tilted in to the limit in this position
Fig. 122/A, material may fall over the rear of the bucket.
☞ Do not tilt in a standard bucket filled with material in this position
☞ Slightly readjust the standard bucket if necessary (tilt out Fig. 122/B)
☞ In case of a bulky load:
• Secure the load and if necessary, fit the rear of the bucket with a protection
• Install a protective screen (option) onto the cabin
• Use attachments with hydraulic grabs (option)
– see chapter 1 “Attachments with certified material densities” on
page 1-5
B Right ☞ Ensure good visibility of the material you want to pick up and of the work
and travel range
☞ Pay attention to the safe load indicator - see Safe load indicator display unit
(overview) on page 3-63
WARNING
Tipping hazard. Accident hazard. The wheel loader can tip over when
turning or traveling on slopes with a full bucket.
☞ Tilt in the standard bucket completely
☞ Set the loader unit to transport position- see Transport position of standard
bucket in work operation on page 3-81
Fig. 122 : Safety instructions for transporting material ☞ Travel in reverse when transporting a standard bucket loaded with material
on a slope
IMPORTANT
Machine travel on public roads with a full bucket is prohibited in Germany!
☞ Install the bucket the other way round during machine travel on public roads
– see chapter 3 “Transport position of standard bucket on public roads” on
page 3-37
3-82 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Practical recommendations for digging

NOTICE: The telescopic boom can be damaged when picking up/loading or pushing
material with the telescopic boom extended.
A
☞ Always retract the telescopic boom completely before picking up/loading or pushing
material!
B • Exits from pits must be outside the digging line and as level as possible
• Dig by removing adjacent strips if possible
• Ensure that you can drive forward when moving out of the digging area with a fully
Fig. 123 : Tilt position of the bucket loaded bucket
• Whenever possible, travel in reverse when transporting a full bucket down a steep
slope
Tilt position of the bucket
• The position of surface A on the upper edge of the bucket corresponds to the position
of leading edge B
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-83

Operation
Loading loose material

☞ Align the blade parallel with the ground 1
C ☞ Lower the loader unit to the ground 2. To do this: push the control lever forward C
Fig. 124 : Horizontal lowering of the loader unit
☞ Drive forward into the material 1

When the engine speed decrease due to too much material:
☞ Raise loader unit 2 slightly. To do this: pull the control lever to the rear E
E
2
1
Fig. 125 : Traveling into the material
When the bucket is full:

A ☞ Tilt in the bucket 1. To do this: push the control lever to the left A
☞ Reduce engine speed
E
☞ Raise the loader unit 2. To do this: pull the control lever to the rear E
☞ Reverse out of the material 3
3 Lower the loader unit to transport position
1 - see Transport position of standard bucket in work operation on page 3-81
2
Fig. 126 : Tilting in the bucket
3-84 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Loading if the material is hard to penetrate

☞ Proceed as for loading loose material, but in addition:
A ☞ Tilt the bucket in and out slightly. To do this: move control lever to the left A and right B
B
Fig. 127 : Loading if the material is hard to penetrate
When the bucket is full:

A ☞ Tilt in the bucket 1. To do this: push the control lever to the left A
☞ Reduce engine speed
E
☞ Reverse out of the material 3
3 ☞ Lower the loader unit to transport position
1 - see Transport position of standard bucket in work operation on page 3-81
2
Fig. 128 : Tilting in the bucket
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-85

Operation
Removing material/digging in soft soil
C WARNING
Risk of collapsing. A vertical foundation wall can collapse if walls
or foundations are underminded.
1 ☞ Do not undermine foundations or walls.
☞ Place the bucket horizontally on the ground 1. To do this: push the control lever forward C
Fig. 129 : Lowering the loader unit to the ground
☞ Adjust the digging angle 1. To do this:push the control lever to the right B
1
α
1
Fig. 130 : Adjusting the digging angle
☞ Drive the machine forward 1

A Once the bucket has penetrated the soil:
☞ Adjust the digging angle slightly flatter 2.
To do this:push the control lever to the left A, so that
• Layer being removed is as even as possible and
• Wheel spin is reduced
1
2 Proceed as for loading loose material
Fig. 131 : Removing an even layer
3-86 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Removing material/digging in hard soil

☞ Lower the bucket horizontally to the ground 1. To do this: push the control lever forward C
A C ☞ Adjust the digging angle flatter 2 than for digging in soft soil. To do this: push the control
lever to the left A
☞ Drive the machine forward 3 and
3 ☞ Press the bucket downward a little. To do this: push the control lever forward C a little
1
2
Fig. 132 : Removing hard soil
Once the bucket has penetrated the soil:

A ☞ Adjust the digging angle slightly flatter 1. To do this:push the control lever to the left
A, so that
B
• Layer being removed is as even as possible and
• Wheel spin is reduced
☞ Push the control lever to the left A, or
move it alternately to the left A and right B to loosen the material.
1 Proceed as for loading material hard to penetrate
Fig. 133 : Adjusting the digging angle flatter
Loading heaped material (non-compacted material)
A C WARNING
B Risk of collapsing. Excavated material can collapse if it is undermined.

E
☞ Do not undermine excavated material.
☞ Set the bucket blade parallel to the ground. To do this: push control lever to the left A
or right B
☞ Lower the loader unit horizontally to the ground. To do this: push the control lever
forward C
Fig. 134 : Penetrating heaped material ☞ Drive forward
After penetrating the heaped material:
☞ Raise the loader unit evenly. To do this: pull the control lever backward E and
☞ Keep the bucket level
When the loader unit cannot be raised further:
A ☞ Tilt in the bucket 1. To do this: push the control lever to the left A and
E ☞ Reverse out of the material 3
3 1
☞ Lower the loader unit to transport position - see Transport position of standard bucket in
work operation on page 3-81
2
Fig. 135 : Reversing away from heaped material
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-87

Operation
Loading heaped material (compacted material)

☞ Proceed as for non-compacted material, however when raising the telescopic boom
A through the heaped material:
B ☞ Tilt the bucket slightly in and out 1. To do this:
move the control lever alternately to the left and right A and B
➥ Material is loosened
1
Fig. 136 : Heaped compacted material
Grading
After having finished removing/loading the material:
☞ Lower the telescopic boom horizontally to the ground 1
2 ☞ Reverse across the surface to be graded 2
1
Fig. 137 : Grading
Practical recommendations for loading vehicles

When loading vehicles, we recommend taking the following into account:
• If possible, the truck and the working direction of the telescopic loader should form
an angle of 45°
• Only raise the full bucket to the tilt-out height when you are driving in a straight line
toward the truck
• If possible dump with the wind behind you to keep the dust away from your eyes,
air filters and fans
Fig. 138 : Loading vehicles.
Freeing the machine

If your machine gets stuck in the ground:
☞ Tilt out the bucket until the blade is vertical above the ground
☞ Lower the telescopic boom all the way
☞ Gradually tilt in the bucket
➥ The machine is pushed backward
☞ Reverse slowly
☞ Repeat this procedure until the wheels reach firm ground
☞ Reverse the machine away
3-88 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.56 Fitting a multipurpose bucket

Fields of application for multipurpose bucket
The standard bucket is mainly used for digging earth, and for loosening, picking up,
transporting and loading loose or solid materials.
Machine travel on public roads with a full bucket is prohibited according to
StVZO (German road traffic regulations)
- see Attachments with certified material densities on page 1-5.
In addition, bear in mind the mandatory regulations relevant to accident prevention.
The machine and the attachment may be used for applications with lifting gear
only if the prescribed safety devices are in place and functional.
These are for example:
• Safe possibilities of slinging and securing lifting gear (load hook)
– see chapter 2 “Applications with lifting gear” on page 2-7
• Load diagram!
M
L WARNING
Crushing hazard, injury or accident hazard due to damage on the
attachment mount. Catch bolt H is not aligned with mounting bore L
of the attachment. This can release the attachment.
☞ Have a worn limit stop M of the attachment or a bent catch bolt H
replaced by an authorized service center.
Removing the transport hooks

The transport hooks installed in the multipurpose bucket must be removed before
working with the bucket.
☞ Remove transport hooks A as follows
• Remove the transport hooks
• Close the bores with the fastening screws of the hooks
A
Fig. 140 : Removing the transport hooks
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-89

Operation
Picking up a multipurpose bucket with the quickhitch

or side swing bucket, for example – you must follow the special information given in the
WARNING
unexpectedly.
H
Fig. 141 : Checking the lock pins on the attachment
☞ Secure the 3rd control circuit after locking
☞ The multipurpose bucket is picked up and installed on the quickhitch in the same way
as the standard bucket
Hydraulic connections on the multipurpose bucket
D C Hydraulic connection Function

C Pressurized Opens the multipurpose bucket
D Pressurized Closes the multipurpose bucket
3-90 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Connecting hydraulic lines to the machine
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. Attachments that are not locked on the quickhitch
can tip over, crush or cut.
the quickhitch by means of the lock cylinder. You must be able to see
the lock pins on either side of the mounting holes on the attachment.
☞ Ensure that the lock pins of the quickhitch are fully extended before cou-
pling the hydraulic lines of the additional control circuit onto the attachment
- see Unlocking and locking attachments (option) on page 3-67.
NOTICE: The hydraulic system of the machine is still pressurized even when the
engine is not running! The hydraulic quick couplers can be released, however they
cannot be re-attached because the pressure in the hydraulic lines has not been released.
In order to avoid damage to the quick couplers:
☞ Stop the diesel engine
☞ Release the pressure in the sections of the system and hydraulic lines that are to be
opened before connecting an attachment
☞ Stop the engine

B A ☞ Apply the parking brake
☞ Release the pressure in the hydraulic lines
- see “plus powerflow” operation (switchable pressure relief valve) (option) on page 3-72
☞ Clean the hydraulic connections on the multipurpose bucket
☞ Remove flexible lines A and B from the quick couplers of the quickhitch and connect
D C
them onto the quick couplers of the multipurpose bucket
➥ Flexible line A onto quick coupler C
Fig. 142 : Hydraulic connection to multipurpose bucket
➥ Flexible line B onto quick coupler D
IMPORTANT
Never connect the hydraulic lines crosswise, otherwise the attachment
functions are inverted and the hydraulic lines squeezed by tilting the
attachment in and out.
• Ensure that the hydraulic lines cannot be squeezed within the entire
moving range of the attachment
• Checking the function of the multipurpose bucket
IMPORTANT
Clean the quick couplers carefully before connecting an attachment in
order to ensure proper function and sealing features!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-91

Operation
Checking the function of the multipurpose bucket (mechanical, standard)
Operation via 3rd control circuit Result

O
11 This applies pressure to the hydraulic

Move control lever 11 forward to position O line (red) on the left and closes the
multipurpose bucket
Z
This applies pressure to the hydraulic

Move control lever 11 backward to position Z line (blue) on the right and opens the
multipurpose bucket
Fig. 143 : Checking the function (mechanical, standard)
Checking the function of the multipurpose bucket (electrical, option)

Operation via 3rd control circuit Result

Press switch 89 on the control lever to the left B line (blue) on the right and opens the
multipurpose bucket
Press switch 89 on the control lever to the right A line (red) on the left and closes the
multipurpose bucket
B A
89 10
Fig. 144 : Checking the function (electrical, option)
3-92 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Removing the multipurpose bucket from the quickhitch
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. Incorrectly lowered attachments can tip over,
crush or cut.
☞ Lower an attachment to level ground ensuring that it cannot tip over.
☞ Lower an attachment to the ground ensuring that it cannot tip over or
swivel suddenly after it is unlocked.
IMPORTANT
If the attachment is placed in direct sunlight after having been taken off, the oil
in the hydraulic cylinders will warm up. This leads to a pressure increase in the
hydraulic cylinders that will make it difficult to attach the hydraulic lines to the
hydraulic connections.
☞ Empty the multipurpose bucket

B A ☞ Align the multipurpose bucket horizontally to the ground and lower it to the ground
☞ Stop the engine, but do not switch off the starter
☞ Release the pressure in the hydraulic lines of the 3rd control circuit
- see “plus powerflow” operation (switchable pressure relief valve) (option) on page 3-72
E F
➥ Multipurpose bucket closes without pressure
☞ Connect flexible line A to plug F of the quickhitch
Fig. 145 : Hydraulic connection on quickhitch
☞ Connect flexible line B to plug E of the quickhitch
☞ Remove the electrical connections if necessary
IMPORTANT
Never connect the hydraulic lines crosswise, otherwise the functions of the
quickhitch cylinder are inverted and the hydraulic lines squeezed by tilting
the attachment in and out.
After connecting the hydraulic cylinder of the quickhitch – as described above:

☞ Close the quick couplers on the multipurpose bucket with protective caps
☞ Start the engine
Remove the multipurpose bucket from the quickhitch
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-93

Operation
3.57 Working with the multipurpose bucket

General safety instructions for working with the multipurpose bucket
WARNING
Tipping hazard.
A malfunctioning safe load indicator or working at more than 100 % of the safe
work load can cause the machine to tip over. -
☞ A flashing indicator and an acoustic signal warn of loads exceeding 100 %.
The operator must retract the telescopic boom to reduce the load below the
100 % limit!
➥ - see Safe load indicator display unit (overview) on page 3-63
• Bear in mind the safety instructions given in the following chapters before working
with the machine:
• Safety instructions on page 2-1,
• Designated use on page 2-2,
• Safety instructions regarding operation on page 2-4
• Never drive up to the edge of a pit from outside
• Never undermine the foundations of walls
• Operation of the machine by unauthorized personnel is prohibited!
• When working with the machine, look out for high-voltage cables, underground cables,
gas and water pipes!
• The hydraulic system of the machine is still pressurized even when the engine is not
running! Release the pressure in the sections of the system and hydraulic lines that
are to be opened before starting setup or repair work, for example fitting/removing a
hydraulic attachment - see Pressure relief on the quick couplers and the quickhitch on
page 3-71
• If the telescopic loader is equipped with a load stabilizer (option):
• Switch off the load stabilizer before working with the telescopic boom – otherwise
it will yield very easily, making it difficult to perform any precise lifting movements
- see Load stabilizer (option) on page 3-52
• Do not perform any jerky movements with the control lever (joystick)
• Set down and pick up loads carefully at low diesel engine speed
• Before leaving the machine, lower the bucket to the ground, stop the diesel engine,
switch off the starter and remove the key
3-94 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Driving on public roads with the multipurpose bucket
WARNING
Accident hazard due to raised loader unit
☞ Transport material in a bucket only in transport position.
NOTICE: In order to avoid damage to the machine or tires, do not move the machine
with the bucket fully tilted out
☞ Lower the attachment to transport position and tilt it in
IMPORTANT
Machine travel on public roads with a bucket is prohibited in Germany!
• If the standard bucket is filled with material
• if the distance between the front edge of the bucket and the center
of the steering wheel is over 3500 mm (138 in) in transport position.
• if the control levers of the loader unit and of the 3rd control circuit are
not secured
☞ Empty the multipurpose bucket

☞ Tilt in the multipurpose bucket (base position)
☞ Stop the engine
☞ Release the hydraulic oil pressure in the quick couplers
➥ - see Pressure relief on the quick couplers and the quickhitch on page 3-71
☞ Uncouple the hydraulic lines from the multipurpose bucket and connect them to the
quickhitch
➥ - see Removing the multipurpose bucket from the quickhitch on page 3-93
☞ Set the multipurpose bucket to transport position
➥ - see Transport position of multipurpose bucket on page 3-96
☞ Mount parts on the machine (front-edge protection of bucket, light strip or additional
clearance lights – if necessary, and if fitted on the machine depending on the legal
regulations of your country) as required by national road traffic regulations
☞ Locking the control lever (joystick)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-95

Operation
Transport position of multipurpose bucket
CAUTION
In order to avoid damage to the tires, do not perform machine travel
with the bucket fully tilted out!
☞ Tilt in the bucket and lower it to transport position
CAUTION
Accident hazard due to raised loader unit
A ☞ Transport material in a multipurpose bucket only in transport position.
B To do this:
• Tilt in multipurpose bucket A completely
C • Lower the loader unit until marks C on the loader unit and machine
frame are lined up
The distance of the multipurpose bucket to the ground B is about 200 mm
with standard tires.
Fig. 146 : Transport position of standard bucket
3-96 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Safety instructions regarding work with a full multipurpose bucket
A Wrong WARNING
When tilted in transport position, the multipurpose bucket performs parallel
movements as the telescopic boom is raised and extended.
If the multipurpose bucket is unintentionally tilted in to the limit in this position
A, material may fall over the rear of the bucket.
☞ Raise a full multipurpose bucket only at the tilt-out position, and only when
the machine is at a standstill
☞ Do not tilt in a multipurpose bucket filled with material in this position
☞ Slightly readjust the multipurpose bucket if necessary (tilt out Fig. 147/B)
• Use attachments with hydraulic grabs (option)
B Right – see chapter 1 “Attachments with certified material densities” on
page 1-5
☞ Ensure good visibility of the material you want to pick up and of the work
and travel range
☞ Pay attention to the safe load indicator
- see Safe load indicator display unit (overview) on page 3-63
WARNING
Tipping hazard. Accident hazard. The wheel loader can tip over when
turning or traveling on slopes with a full bucket.
☞ Tilt in the multipurpose bucket completely
Fig. 147 : Safety instructions for transporting material ☞ Set the loader unit to transport position
- see Transport position of standard bucket in work operation on page 3-81
☞ Travel in reverse when transporting a multipurpose bucket loaded with
material on a slope
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-97

Operation
Practical recommendations for digging

• Exits from pits must be outside the digging line and as level as possible
• Dig by removing adjacent strips if possible
• Whenever possible, travel in reverse when transporting a full bucket down a steep
slope
Tilt position of the bucket
• The position of surface A on the upper edge of the bucket corresponds to the position
A of leading edge B
CAUTION
B In order to avoid damage to the telescopic boom, push material with the
multipurpose bucket only if the telescopic boom is retracted!
If the multipurpose bucket is very full, the material can fall over the rear of the
Fig. 148 : Tilt position of the bucket bucket and the slide surfaces of the extended telescopic boom can become
dirty.
☞ Always retract the telescopic boom completely before picking up or pushing
material!
Grading and scraping
WARNING
Tipping hazard. During machine travel with a raised and full bucket, the
machine can tip over when turning or traveling across a slope.
☞ Perform machine travel with an empty or loaded bucket in the lowest
possible position to keep the center of gravity as low as possible and
to prevent the machine from tipping over on a slope or when turning.
☞ Tilt the bucket fully in.
Ansicht_009.iso ☞ Raise the telescopic boom to transport position.
☞ Grading
• Fold up the front half of the bucket
• Set the depth of the layer you want to remove with the lift hydraulics
• Set the angle of the rear cutting edge
☞ Drawing material backward
Ansicht_008.iso
• Tilt out the multipurpose bucket
• Raise the bucket with the lift hydraulics
Fig. 149 : Grading work with a multipurpose bucket
• Fold up the front half of the bucket
• Lower the multipurpose bucket to the ground
• Set the angle of the bucket
• Surfaces are graded or scraped during reverse travel
3-98 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Stripping in thin layers (scraper)

☞ Set a flat digging angle
☞ Fold up the front half of the bucket by about 10 to 15 cm
☞ Start machine travel
➥ The material rolls into the bucket and is picked up at the same time
IMPORTANT
This position allows to strip grass turf, for example, down to a thickness of
about 8 cm.
Ansicht_007.iso
Fig. 150 : Removing material in thin layers with a

multipurpose bucket
Spreading material in thin layers

☞ Set the rear cutting edge parallel to the ground
☞ Fold up the front half of the bucket until the required quantity of material is emptied
onto the ground
☞ Start machine travel
☞ Lower the multipurpose bucket to the ground
➥ The rear cutting edge grades the material as it is emptied by opening the front half
of the bucket
Ansicht_007.iso IMPORTANT
Fig. 151 : Spreading material with the multipurpose bucket
This position allows to spread material without traveling on the lower layer
with the machine (for example applying the first bituminous base onto sensitive
antifrost layers, applying granulated material onto plastic coatings).
Pulling out material from slopes
IMPORTANT
This position allows to pull material out of slopes or roadside ditches with
maximum safety and to spread it as required.
Ansicht_006.iso
Fig. 152 : Pulling out material with a multipurpose bucket
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-99

Operation
Moving material with longer reach
IMPORTANT
This position allows to move material without damaging slopes or structures.
Ansicht_005.iso
➥ Backfilling with maximum safety and without damaging slopes
Fig. 153 : Filling in material with a multipurpose bucket
Picking up remaining material
IMPORTANT
Both bucket halves must touch the ground so that all the material is picked up.
☞ Fold up the front half of the bucket (multipurpose bucket)

☞ Tilt out the bucket
Ansicht_003.iso
☞ Lower the bucket to the ground. Ensure that both bucket halves touch the ground
Fig. 154 : Picking up remaining material with the ☞ Close and tilt in the multipurpose bucket at the same time
multipurpose bucket
☞ Raise the bucket with the lift hydraulics
Grabbing bulky material

➥ The multipurpose bucket allows to safely grab, pick up and transport building timber,
reinforcement bars, packaging bands, wire, etc.
Ansicht_002.iso
Fig. 155 : Picking up bulky material with a multipurpose

bucket
3-100 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Grabbing large objects

➥ The multipurpose bucket allows to safely grab, pick up and transport large objects
Ansicht_016.iso
Fig. 156 : Grabbing large objects with the multipurpose

bucket
Pulling out and setting posts

☞ Open the multipurpose bucket and lower it over the post. Close the bucket to grip the
post firmly
☞ Loosen the post with careful up-and-down movements
Ansicht_001.iso
Fig. 157 : Moving posts with a multipurpose bucket
Precise unloading
➥ Precise dosing and placement of pourable material
Ansicht_012.iso
Fig. 158 : Precise unloading with the multipurpose bucket
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-101

Operation
Backfilling round gravel into drainage ditches

➥ Bucket teeth move back from the wall as the bucket opens
Ansicht_011.iso
Fig. 159 : Backfilling and unloading material with a

multipurpose bucket
Unloading from the bottom of the bucket for increased tilt-out heights
➥ Increases the tilt-out height by at least 55 cm (depending on bucket size), as compared
to tilting with a standard bucket
IMPORTANT
Smaller tilt reach is compensated by pushing the material with the open
multipurpose bucket as shown.
Ansicht_010.iso
Ansicht_013.iso
Fig. 160 : Unloading from the bottom of a multipurpose

bucket
3-102 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.58 Fitting pallet forks

Fields of application for pallet forks
The pallet forks are mainly used for picking up, transporting and loading palletized
material, pallets and other stacked material!
Transporting loads on pallet forks on public roads is prohibited!
In addition, bear in mind the mandatory regulations relevant to accident prevention!
Caution! Before leaving the machine, lower the pallet forks to the ground, stop the
diesel engine, switch off the starter and remove the key
IMPORTANT
The pallet forks are not certified for applications with lifting gear!
Do not hitch any hooks, eyelets, etc. either onto the pallet forks or fork arms
as lifting gear!
• The machine and the attachment may be used for applications with lifting gear only
if the prescribed safety devices are in place and functional.
M
L WARNING
Crushing hazard, injury or accident hazard due to damage on the
attachment mount. Catch bolt H is not aligned with mounting bore L of the
attachment. This can release the attachment.
☞ Have a worn limit stop M of the attachment or a bent catch bolt H replaced
by an authorized service center.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-103

Operation
Fitting an attachment onto the quickhitch
WARNING
unexpectedly.
H
the quickhitch by means of the lock cylinder!
on the attachment
☞ Secure the 3rd control circuit after locking - see Unlocking and locking
attachments (standard) on page 3-66
☞ The multipurpose bucket is picked up and installed on the quickhitch in the same way
as the standard bucket
Removing the pallet forks from the quickhitch
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. Incorrectly lowered attachments can tip over, crush or cut.
☞ Position the attachment so that after unlocking it will stand safely and not tip over
☞ The pallet forks are removed from the quickhitch in the same way as the standard
bucket
3-104 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Machine travel on public roads
WARNING
Accident hazard! In Germany, machine travel on public roads with the pallet
forks fitted is prohibited!
☞ Remove the pallet forks and transport them with an adequate means of
transport during machine travel on public roads
- see Special instructions for machine travel on public roads on page 3-36!
Caution
Injury or accident hazard. If pallet forks are transported in a bucket installed
on the machine without being fastened and secured, they can fall out of the
bucket, onto the road and into the traffic.
☞ Do not transport the pallet forks in a bucket.
☞ - see Special instructions for machine travel on public roads on page 3-36
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-105

Operation
3.59 Working with the pallet forks

General safety instructions regarding the pallet forks
Picking up loads
• Secure the 3rd control circuit against unintentional operation
a - see Lock for loader unit control lever and mechanical locking of 3rd control circuit
• Ensure that only authorized persons handle and work with the attachment
• Stay clear of suspended loads a!
• Do not transport persons in the attachment
• The pallet forks may not be used for applications with lifting gear!
• Follow the safety instructions in the Operator’s Manual of the attachment!
• Before starting work, ensure that the fork arms on the fork frame are safely locked!
a
Secure with locking lever against sliding sideways!
• Never use bent, cracked or otherwise damaged fork arms/pallet forks!
• Do not overload the attachment or the machine, observe the load diagram
- see Pallet forks load diagram on page 3-109!
b • Pay attention to the safe load indicator (option)
• Ensure machine stability
• Never exceed the maximum load!
• Approach the material as closely as possible!
• Always approach the material with the machine wheels in straight-ahead position!
• Always load on firm and level ground with sufficient load-bearing capacity only!
• Never raise a load with only one fork arm!
• Move the fork arms all the way through under the pallets, as far as they will go,
so that the load is picked up the nearest possible to the fork frame!
• Move under the load with the straight fork arms as far apart as possible and at an
equal distance from the left and right side of the load b!
• Never leave the machine with the load raised!
126801d0.ai
3-106 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Transporting loads
• Do not drive on public roads with an attachment fitted on the machine!
• Always tilt in the attachment a little (toward the machine) for transport!
• Lower the bucket the nearest possible to the ground for transport.
Observe minimum ground clearance!
• Maintain a distance of a minimum 6 m (20 ft) between the loader unit/load and
overhead lines!
• Never operate the loader unit and the attachments at higher machine speed!
• Never leave the machine with the load raised!
• In order to avoid unlocking the pallet forks, secure the 3rd control circuit on the machine
• On slopes, the load must be on the uphill side of the machine/attachment. Drive the
machine backward on sloping terrain to prevent the load from falling off and the
machine from tilting forward when braking!
• Drive slowly with a raised load, especially in off-road applications, to avoid strong
swinging movements of the load!
• When transporting large bulk loads drive the machine backward for improved visibility.
• Observe the load-bearing capacity of bridges, basement ceilings, vaults etc., before
moving the machine on them!
• Bear in mind the clearances of underpasses, tunnels, gates, etc. before machine travel
through or under them!
Setting down loads
• Loads must only be set down on a suitable base with sufficient stability and
load-bearing capacity
• Do not stack or set down in higher places loads which are not properly packaged or
which have shifted, or load units with damaged pallets/stacking containers
• Set down loads only in places where they will stand safely without tilting, falling down
or sliding! Affix appropriate marks to loads which have been set down, especially in the
area of public and private traffic!
• Observe the load-bearing capacity of the set-down area (for example truck platforms,
storage area in high-bay warehouses, etc.)
• Load the loading area of vehicles or trailers evenly and distribute the load evenly on the
axles
• Stack loads only up to the authorized maximum pallet height
• Do not set down loads too near to slopes, construction pits, etc.
Do not set down loads in transit or escape routes, and not in front of safety facilities or
works equipment which must be accessible at any time
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-107

Operation
Brief instructions for fork arms

The following brief instructions are based on the
“Guidelines for testing and repairing fork arms” (© by VETTER Umformtechnik GmbH):
• Use fork arms only according to their designated use
• Do not exceed the load center and the load-bearing capacity
• Always keep fork arms clean
• Load both fork arms evenly
• Do not use standard fork arms as reverse forks
• Do not push, pull or shove the fork arms, or move them in at a slanting angle
(risk of damaging them due to lateral forces)
• Do not pull off loads, or allow them to fall onto the fork arms
• Tie down loads, if necessary, to avoid loosing them
• Do not raise with the tilt cylinder (tilt device)
• Bear in mind the limits of application for the fork lift, and its Operator’s Manuals
• Perform frequent visual checks
• Have regular checks performed according to the Operator’s Manual and the legal
regulations of your country
• Do not modify the fork arms, or attach any additional device
• Only the manufacturer is authorized to perform repair work on the fork arms
• No transport of persons on the fork arms
• No transportation of molten material
• Cable-laying work is prohibited
• Observe the legal regulations of your country during machine travel on public roads
• The operating company/operator must check at regular intervals:
• Lock: functional check
• Hooks: visual check for cracks and deformations
• Bend: visual check for indents, nicks and cracks
• Bend and blade: do not use any longer if worn over 10 %
• Blade and tip: check for deformations
• In case of damage or if you are unsure:
immediately stop using the fork arms!
3-108 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Pallet forks load diagram
C D
Fig. 163 : Load diagram
NOTICE: The load diagram in the cabin is valid only for use with the pallet forks with
fork arms as specified and released in Attachments with certified material densities on
page 1-5. Pay attention to the specific load diagrams of other attachments used!
The load diagram states the maximum load on the fork arms for industrial (S = 1.25)
and offroad (S = 1.67) applications respectively. The maximum load varies according
to the horizontal distance of the center of the load to the contact area of the tires.
In order to be able to read it more easily, the diagram has been divided in four shaded
sections to show the movement of the telescopic boom. The distance between the center
of the load and the rear side of the fork arms is 500 mm (20 in).
Maximum load
Range – distance from load center
to tire contact area Industrial applications Off-road applications
(S = 1.25) (S = 1.67)
A Over 3.00 m (118 in) 950 kg (2094 lbs.) 700 kg (1543 lbs.)
B 2.20 to 2.60 m (87 to 102 in) 1210 kg (2667 lbs.) 900 kg (1984 lbs.)
C 1.80 to 2.20 m (71 to 87 in) 1470 kg (3240 lbs.) 100 kg (220 lbs.)
D Below 2.20 m (87 in) 1730 kg (3813 lbs.) 1290 kg (2844 lbs.)
Example for range B:
• Off-road applications = safety factor S = 1.67
➥ Load distance from rear side of fork arms = 500 mm (20 in)
➥ Height of fork arm above tire contact area = 1.50 m (59 in)
➥ Distance from tire contact area = 2.60 m (102 in)
➥ Maximum load is 1085 kg (2392 lbs.)!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-109

Operation
Adjusting the fork arms
Caution
Injury hazard or risk of damage to the machine. The load can become unstable
and fall if the fork arms are not secured and slip sideways.
☞ Before using the pallet forks with or without load, check whether both lock-
ing levers on the fork arms are folded down. This correctly locks the safety
pins of the fork arms in the notches on the fork frame, and prevents the fork
arms from slipping or sliding sideways.
126801f0.ai
When the fork arms are moved under the load, they must have the biggest possible
spacing between them, or be introduced at the positions or in the fixtures provided for
to this effect.
a
The fork arms must always be evenly aligned with the fork frame.
To achieve this, the spacing of the fork arms can be adjusted as follows:
☞ Set the locking lever to the vertical position a
➥ The fork arms can be moved on the fork frame
☞ Slide the fork arms to the required distance until the safety pin engages in a slot
on the fork frame
☞ Fold down the locking lever again, position b
➥ The upper edge of the locking lever must be flush with the edge c.
126801e0.ai
3-110 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Safety instructions regarding work with pallet forks loaded with material
A Wrong WARNING
When tilted in transport position, the pallet forks perform parallel movements
as the telescopic boom is raised and extended.
If the pallet forks are unintentionally tilted in to the limit in this position Fig. 164/
A, material may fall over the rear of the bucket.
☞ Do not tilt in a multipurpose bucket filled with material in this position
☞ Slightly readjust the pallet forks if necessary (tilt out Fig. 164/B)
☞ Ensure good visibility of the material you want to pick up and of the work
and travel range
☞ Pay attention to the safe load indicator - see Safe load indicator display unit
B Right (overview) on page 3-63
WARNING
Tipping hazard. Accident hazard. The loader can tip over when turning or
traveling on slopes with loaded pallet forks.
☞ Tilt in the pallet forks completely
☞ Set the loader unit to transport position- see Pallet forks transport position
on page 3-113
☞ Travel in reverse when transporting pallet forks loaded with material on a
slope
Fig. 164 : Safety instructions for transporting material
WARNING
Accident hazard! In Germany, machine travel on public roads with the pallet
forks fitted is prohibited!
☞ Remove the pallet forks and transport them with an adequate means of
transport during machine travel on public roads
- see Putting into operation for the first time on page 3-9!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-111

Operation
Picking up loads with the pallet forks
WARNING
Tipping hazard. Accident hazard. The wheel loader can tip over if
the load is too high and the telescopic boom extended.
☞ Work carefully! Adapt the travel speed and loads to the terrain.
Refer to the load diagram for the maximum permissible loads!
➥ - see Pallet forks load diagram on page 3-109
➥ - see Safety instructions regarding the safe load indicator on page 3-62
☞ Retract the telescopic boom if the load is over 85 % (flashing indicator and
acoustic signal)
IMPORTANT
If the machine is equipped with the “Hose burst valve” option, ensure that the
load stabilizer (option) is switched off!
If the load stabilizer is switched on, the hose burst valve is disabled and offers
no protection in the event of line damage. In other words, the loader unit can
be lowered and an attachment tilted out
Approaching the material

☞ Stop the machine immediately in front of the material
☞ Set the fork arms parallel to the ground
Fig. 165 : Position of machine and tines toward the material
☞ Check the distance of the fork arms to the center line (dashed line in Fig. 166)
The fork arms must be at the same distance from the center line and as far apart as possible
Fig. 166 : Checking fork spacing
3-112 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Loading material
☞ Adjust the height of the fork arms so that the pallet can be correctly loaded
☞ Move carefully forward until the fork frame is in contact with the material
☞ Ensure that the pallet is safely loaded on the fork arms
Fig. 167 : Picking up a load
☞ Raise the loader unit slowly and ensure that the limits
of load diagram and safe load indicator are not exceeded!
☞ In case of doubt or danger, lower the load immediately!
Fig. 168 : Raise the loader unit
1. ☞ Tilt the fork frame backward a little (1)

2. 4.
☞ Retract the telescopic boom completely (2)
☞ Ensure that the area behind the machine is clear
3. ☞ Release the parking brake and reverse carefully (4)
until the loader unit can be lowered to transport position
☞ In transport position, lower the loader unit as far as possible (3)
Fig. 169 : Moving the material to transport position
☞ Reverse slowly from the stack (4)
• Transport the material in transport position only
Pallet forks transport position
CAUTION
In order to avoid damage to the tires, do not move the machine with
pallet forks fully tilted out to the limit!
Fig. 170 : Pallet forks transport position ☞ Tilt in the pallet forks and lower them to transport position
IMPORTANT
Transport position is reached as soon as the material is slightly tilted back,
the telescopic boom is fully retracted and the loader unit is lowered as far down
as possible.
• The distance of the pallet forks to the ground B is about 200 mm (7.87 in)
with standard tires
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-113

Operation
Transporting loads with the pallet forks
WARNING
Tipping hazard. Accident and injury hazard!
When transporting loads with the pallet forks raised,
the load can fall down or the machine can tilt!
☞ Especially in curves and on slopes, ensure that
the center of gravity is at the lowest possible point.
☞ After picking up the load:
• Tilt in the pallet forks
• Lower the loader unit to transport position
☞ Raise the loader unit just before setting down the load
☞ Never raise the load over persons
☞ Never park the machine with the load raised
☞ Never leave the machine with the load raised
☞ Avoid any operation that might be a risk to machine stability
• Move the load only when it is safely placed on the fork arms
• Move the machine only if you have sufficient visibility.
• Start, turn and stop smoothly.
• Concentrate on your work, avoid distractions!
• Lower/raise loads to transport position before moving and transporting them
Fig. 171 : Pallet forks transport position (bear in mind the ground clearance). If necessary, increase ground clearance
for off-road applications
• Always tilt in the pallet forks a little (toward the machine) for transport!
• Always drive slowly, especially in off-road applications, to avoid strong swinging
movements of the load!
• On slopes, the load must be on the uphill side of the machine/attachment.
Drive the machine backward on sloping terrain to prevent the load from falling off
and the machine from tilting forward when braking
• When transporting large bulk loads drive the machine backward for improved visibility.
IMPORTANT
Transporting loads is only allowed on construction sites or on company premises.
3-114 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
Setting down material with the pallet forks

☞ With the material in transport position, approach the stack from the front so that the
material is in the middle of the stack (Fig. 172)
☞ Raise the loader unit (1)
Fig. 172 : Aligning the material with the stack
3. ☞ Extend the telescopic boom (2) carefully until the load is positioned precisely above the stack
2. ☞ Put the fork arms level again (3)
☞ Lower the loader unit slowly (4), making sure that the preset limits of the load diagram
4. 1. and the safe load indicator are not exceeded! In case of doubt or danger, stop stacking
immediately! To do this:
☞ First retract the telescopic boom and then
Fig. 173 : Setting down a load ☞ Lower the loader unit
• To align the load with the stack, retract/extend the telescopic boom with caution
• Lower the load
Ensure that the fork arms are no longer under load:
☞ Retract telescopic boom
☞ Ensure that the area behind the machine is clear
☞ Release the parking brake and carefully reverse from the stack until the loader unit can
be lowered to transport position
☞ Tilt the fork frame backward
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-115

Operation
3.60 “Hose burst valve” safety feature

In the event of a bursting hose or pipe, the “Hose burst valve” safety feature prevents the
loader unit from being lowered or tilted out in an uncontrolled manner.
If a hose bursts, the lift or tilt cylinders are blocked and cannot be operated.
IMPORTANT
Switching on the load stabilizer automatically switches off the hose burst valve!
☞ Switch off the load stabilizer to ensure that the hose burst valve works correctly
- see Switching the load stabilizer ON and OFF on page 3-53.
IMPORTANT
Emergency lowering is not possible if the hose burst valve (option) is enabled
due to a hose or pipe rupture!
☞ Remove loads with a second machine if necessary.
☞ Contact an authorized service center.
Switching off the hose burst valve

In the event of damage, proceed as follows:
☞ Stop the machine immediately
☞ Secure the danger zone
☞ If possible, remove any loads with a second machine
☞ Stop the engine
☞ Remove the starting key and lock the cabin
☞ Secure the machine and the attachment
Environment
Collect the drained hydraulic oil in a suitable container.
Dispose of drained hydraulic oil by an ecologically safe method.
Always contact the relevant authorities or commercial establishments in
charge of oil disposal before disposing of biodegradable oil
Have the burst hose or line immediately repaired by an authorized service center
3-116 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.61 Towing the machine

Safety instructions for towing away
If the diesel engine and/or the hydraulic drive breaks down, the machine can be towed
under the following conditions.
• Tow the machine with a towing bar only. The brake and steering systems are not
assisted hydraulically if the diesel engine and/or the hydraulic system break down.
• The machine may only be towed using suitable towing equipment (towing bar) in
connection with suitable towing gear, such as a towing coupling, hooks and eyes!
• When towing with the front towing eye, ensure that the tires do not touch the towing
gear by limiting the steering angle, especially in curves!
• Start machine travel slowly! Ensure that no one is in the danger zone of the towing bar
Getting ready for towing

Disabling the variable displacement drive pump
C B
NOTICE: The hydrostatic drive can be damaged when towing the machine.
A ☞ Tow away the machine from the danger area only after you have opened the HP
pressure relief valves
☞ Towing speed => max. 8 kph (4.97 mph)
☞ Distance => max. 300 m (328 yd)
A ☞ Stop the diesel engine
B
☞ Stop the engine and remove the starting key.
Variable displacement pump 20 kph (12.43 mph)
C
☞ Switch over the HP pressure relief valves A on the variable displacement pump.
To do this:
Fig. 174 : 20 kph hydraulic pump • Loosen hexagon lock nuts B on both HP valves A
• Screw in hexagon socket head screws C on both HP valves A until they are flush
with lock nuts B
• Secure hexagon socket head screws C on both HP valves A with lock nuts B
D F ☞ Towing the machine- see Towing the machine on page 3-118
• Mount hose D between test ports E and F
Variable displacement pump 30 kph (18.64 mph) (option)
☞ Install hose D between test connections E and F
➥ The hose is included in the tool kit
E
If possible, run the diesel engine at idling speed when towing the machine
Fig. 175 : 30 kph hydraulic pump (option)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-117

Operation
Towing the machine
Caution
Towing the machine incorrectly can cause damage to it and possible injury to
persons near it.
☞ The towing vehicle must have enough tractive power and be fitted with a
safe braking system
☞ Always use a towing bar for towing
☞ Fasten the towing bar on the mandatory towing eye hooks
– see chapter 1 “Machine overview” on page 1-2
☞ Pay attention to the machine’s dimensions and weights
– see chapter 6 “Technical data” on page 6-1.
☞ If possible, run the engine at idling speed when towing the machine
➥ Steering and braking requires greater effort if the diesel engine breaks
down
☞ Tow away the machine from the danger area only after you have opened
the HP pressure relief valves on the variable displacement pump
☞ Towing speed => max. 8 kph (4.97 mph)
☞ Distance => max. 300 m (328 yd)
Once towing is over

Enabling the 20 kph (12.43 mph) variable displacement pump
C B
☞ Switch over the HP pressure relief valves A on the variable displacement pump.
To do this:
A
• Loosen hexagon lock nuts B on both HP valves A
• Unscrew hexagon socket screws C on both HP valves A as far as they will go and
secure them with locknuts B
Enabling the 30 kph (18.64 mph) (option) variable displacement pump
A ☞ Remove hose D between test ports E and F, and close the ports with caps
B
Store the hose in the tool box
C
Fig. 174 : 20 kph hydraulic pump
D F
Fig. 175 : 30 kph hydraulic pump (option)
3-118 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.62 Crane-lifting the machine

Safety instructions regarding crane-lifting
In order to avoid injury or accident hazard, observe the following instructions when
loading the machine!
• Seal off the danger zone!
• The crane and the lifting gear must have suitable dimensions!
• Do not attempt to lift the machine with any type of crane, including wheel loaders,
unless the crane operator is qualified to lift loads in craning operations.
• Use OSHA-rated and approved lifting devices capable of lifting the machine,
attachments, options and accumulated debris. Refer to the general information on
weight in the specification section of this manual.
• Use only tested ropes, belts, hooks and shackles (lockable brackets with screws or
socket pins) for fastening!
• Take into account the machine’s overall weight
– see chapter 6 “Technical data” on page 6-1
• Safely secure the machine on means of transport! Use suitable slinging points and
load-securing devices – see chapter 1 “Machine overview” on page 1-2!
• Have loads fastened and crane operators guided by experienced persons only!
They must be experienced with crane operations and hand signals.
• The crane operator shall maintain sight of the personnel attaching, guiding and
unhooking the machine.
• The crane operator must observe all movements of the load and the lifting gear!
Secure the machine against unintentional movement!
• The crane operator may move a load only after making sure that the load is safely
fastened and nobody is within the danger zone, or after receiving a signal from the
persons attaching or securing loads.
• The load must not be fastened by winding the lifting rope or lifting chain around it!
• Bear in mind the load distribution (center of gravity) when fastening the lifting gear
• Load the machine only with the standard bucket empty and in transport position!
• Do not lift the machine with someone in the seat or on the machine.
• Stay clear of suspended loads!
• Bear in mind the safety instructions of this Operator’s Manual on page 2-1 and the
safety-specific legal regulations of your country under all circumstances!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-119

Operation
Crane-lifting the machine
WARNING
Injury hazard and risk of damage to the machine. Do not use the slinging
points B (eyelets) on the cabin or on the towing gear for loading the machine!
☞ Lift the machine only with the help of the specific lifting points A.
34101b330_01.iso
☞ Handle the machine with a crane as follows:
• Install and safely lock the standard bucket
- see Equipping the machine with a standard bucket on page 3-75
A
• Tilt out the standard bucket
• Set the drive to neutral
B
• Tilt in the standard bucket and lower it to transport position
- see Transport position of standard bucket in work operation on page 3-81
Fig. 174 : Crane-lifting
• Apply the parking brake - see Parking brake on page 3-47
• Stop the engine and remove the starting key
• Do not allow anyone to stay in the cabin, and close the doors and the engine cover
• Fasten the loader at the 4 slinging points with lifting gear of sufficient size
– see chapter 1 “Machine overview” on page 1-2
• Carefully raise the machine
3-120 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.63 Loading and transporting the machine on a transportation vehicle

General safety instructions
• The transportation vehicle must be of sufficient size
➥ – see chapter 2 “Transporting and towing” on page 2-9
➥ See chapter “Technical data”, “Weights” on page 6-8 for the machine’s dimensions
and weights!
• Ensure that the authorized maximum height of the transportation vehicle is not
exceeded
• Remove any mud, snow or ice from the tires so that the machine can safely travel onto
the ramps
• Secure the machine against unintentional movement!
• When positioning the load on the platform, ensure that the center of gravity of the
load is as low as possible and in the longitudinal center line of the vehicle if possible
(load distribution plan).
• Do not exceed the gross weight rating and the gross axle weight rating when loading
and transporting the machine.
• Ensure that the load does not fall short of the minimum axle load of the steering axle,
otherwise the steering behavior of the vehicle is seriously affected.
• Place partial loads so as to ensure an even load on all axles.
• Store or secure the load with suitable auxiliary means so that it cannot slip, slide, roll,
tip over or fall, or cause the vehicle to tip over under usual transportation conditions.
• Usual transportation conditions are conditions in the which the brakes are slammed on,
evasive maneuvers are performed with the vehicle or in which uneven roadways are
traveled on. Auxiliary means are for example anti-slip bases and linings, load-securing
straps and chains, clamping beams, protective paddings, nets, edge protectors, etc.
• Depending on the load, adapt the travel speed to the road and traffic conditions and to
the handling of the transportation vehicle.
• Always use the existing tie-down points when using belts and chains
– see chapter 1 “Machine overview” on page 1-2.
• When you tie down the machine with belts, do not place and tighten them in sharp-edged
eyelets
• Before loading, check the oil level in the diesel engine. The oil level must be visible at
the MAX mark of the oil dipstick
Fig. 175 : Label for tying down the machine
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-121

Operation
Loading and tying down the machine
Caution
Possible injury or damage to the machine due to incorrect loading and transporting.
☞ Read the safety instructions at the beginning of this chapter.
☞ Follow any other local safety regulations regarding loading and transporting
the machine.
☞ Load as follows:
• Secure the transportation vehicle with chocks to prevent it from rolling
• Place the access ramps at the smallest possible angle.
Do not exceed an angle of 20°. Use access ramps only with an antiskid surface.
• Ensure that the loading area is clear and access to it is not obstructed – by super-
20˚ structures, for example
30864brampe.eps • Ensure that the access ramps and the wheels of the machine are free of oil,
Fig. 176 : Access ramps grease and ice
• Check the oil level of the diesel engine of the machine you want to load
– see chapter 5 “Checking the oil level once a day” on page 5-8
• Start the diesel engine of the machine you want to load
• Raise the loader unit enough so that it will not touch the access ramps
• Carefully drive the machine onto the middle of the transportation vehicle
• Switch the drive of the machine to be loaded to neutral position
• Lower the loader unit (bucket) to the loading area of the transportation vehicle
• Stop the diesel engine
• Firmly apply the parking brake
- see Parking brake on page 3-47
• Remove the starting key
• Do not allow anyone to stay in the cabin, and close the doors and the engine cover
3-122 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
☞ Tie down the wheel loader as follows:

• Firmly tie down the machine at the eye hooks – see chapter 1 “Machine overview” on
page 1-2 – with ratchet straps or chains of sufficient dimensions onto the platform.
If possible, secure the wheels with additional chocks at the front, rear and at the sides
• Before transporting the machine over longer distances and in heavy rain: close the
outlet of the muffler with a simple cap or suitable adhesive tape
• Ensure that the driver of the transportation vehicle knows the overall height, width
34001b330_02.eps and weight of his vehicle (including the load) before starting machine travel, and
that he observes the legal transport regulations of the country or countries in which
transportation will take place!
34001b330_17.eps
Fig. 177 : Tying down the loader
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-123

Operation
3.64 Putting the machine out of operation for longer time
WARNING
In order to avoid accident hazard, secure the machine on a slope with
additional chocks to prevent it from rolling away!
• Lower the loader unit completely and set the bucket horizontally with the ground
- see Overview of loader unit control lever (standard) on page 3-64
- see Overview of loader unit control lever (option) on page 3-65
• Set the drive to neutral
• Stop the engine and remove the starting key
CAUTION
After operation at full power:
☞ Allow the engine to run for a while so that the temperature can stabilize,
then stop the engine
• Apply the parking brake - see Parking brake on page 3-47

• Close and lock the windows and the door as you leave the cabin
• Lock the engine cover securely- see Opening/closing the engine cover on page 3-20
• Remove the key from the battery master switch - see Battery master switch (option)
on page 3-20
• Take additional measures to secure the machine by placing chocks under the
downhill sides of the wheels
Preserving the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders

• If possible, retract the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders to protect them against
damage. If this is not possible, apply grease to the piston rods and to the bare
parts of the hydraulic cylinders that are not paint-coated
• Before putting the machine into operation, do not clean the piston rods with a
grease solvent or a high-pressure cleaner
➥ The scraper is not water-tight
➥ Water in the guide bushing causes corrosion and damage to the piston rod
Preserving the diesel engine

• Preserving inside
• Preserving outside
IMPORTANT
Preserving work on the engine may only be performed by an authorized
service center according to Deutz specifications!
3-124 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Operation
3.65 Putting the machine out of operation permanently

Notice on decommissioning
If the wheel loader is no longer used according to its designated use, ensure that
it is decommissioned or taken out of service and disposed of according to applicable
regulations.
IMPORTANT
The final decommissioning of the machine must be performed by an
authorized service center or an approved recycling company!
Preparing disposal
• Follow all applicable national safety regulations regarding machine decommissioning!
• Park the machine where it is protected against access by persons without proper
authorization!
• Ensure that the machine cannot be operated between decommissioning and disposal!
• Ensure that the machine presents no hazards at its storage place!
• Ensure that the loader unit is fully lowered and that the bucket is placed horizontally on
the ground! Install all protective devices!
• Ensure that the parking brake is used for parking the machine safely and for preventing
it from rolling away and that the machine is secured in addition by placing chocks under
the downhill sides of the wheels!
• Ensure that all openings (doors, windows, engine cover) of the machine are safely
locked!
• Ensure that there are no leaks on the engine, reservoirs, gearbox and hydraulic
system!
• Remove the battery!
Environment
Avoid environmental damage!
Do not allow the oil and oily wastes to get into the ground or stretches of water!
Dispose of different materials and consumables separately and in an
environmentally friendly manner!
Disposal
Further recycling of the machine must be made in accordance with state-of-the-art
standards applicable at the time of recycling, and in compliance with the national safety
regulations regarding accident prevention!
• All parts must be disposed of in the correct waste disposal sites for the different
materials.
• Separate the material as you recycle parts!
• Ensure environmentally compatible disposal of consumables as well!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm 3-125

Operation
Notes:
3-126 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b340.fm

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
4 Troubleshooting
The information given in this chapter is provided for maintenance personnel,
for fast and reliable detection of malfunctions and their appropriate repair.
Repair work must be performed by an authorized Wacker Neuson service center.
Engine trouble
Diesel engine malfunctions Possible causes Remedy See page

Parking brake not applied Apply the parking brake 3-47
Travel direction not in neutral Set the travel direction to neutral 3-49
Wrong SAE grade of engine lubrication oil Contact an authorized service center –
Fuel grade does not comply with Observe fuel specification when
5-4
specifications adding fuel
Air/no fuel in the fuel system Refuel and

5-6
bleed the fuel system
Diesel engine does not start or is not
Insufficient fuel supply Contact an authorized service center –
easy to start
Malfunctioning or empty battery Replace the battery with a new one 5-43
Loose or oxidized cable connections in Contact an authorized service center
–
starter circuit
Malfunctioning starter, or pinion does not
–
engage
Wrong valve clearance –
Malfunctioning fuel injector –
5-4

5-6
Diesel engine starts, but does not run bleed the fuel system
smoothly or faultless
Wrong valve clearance Contact an authorized service center –
Injection line leaks –
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b410.fm 4-1

Troubleshooting
Oil level too low Add engine oil

5-9
Observe engine oil specification
Oil level too high Contact an authorized service center –
Dirty air filter Replace air filter 5-17
Diesel engine overheats.
Malfunctioning air filter maintenance Contact an authorized service center
Temperature warning system responds –
switch or gage
Dirty oil/water radiator fins Clean the radiator 5-15
Malfunctioning fan, torn or loose V-belt Contact an authorized service center –
Oil level too high –
5-4

5-6
Insufficient diesel engine output Dirty air filter Replace air filter 5-17
–
switch or gage
Diesel engine does not run on all
cylinders Insufficient fuel supply –

5-6
Oil level too low Add engine oil

5-9
Insufficient or no diesel engine oil pressure Machine inclination too high Move machine out of inclination –
Wrong SAE grade of engine lubrication oil Contact an authorized service center –
Malfunctioning piston rings –
Diesel engine oil consumption too high
Diesel engine inclination too high Move machine out of inclination –
Low-load operation of diesel engine Avoid too long engine idle times –
Blue diesel engine smoke
Diesel engine inclination too high Move machine out of inclination –
4-2 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b410.fm

Troubleshooting

Engine starting temperature too low Contact an authorized service center –
5-4
White diesel engine smoke specifications adding fuel
Wrong valve clearance Contact an authorized service center –
Dirty air filter Replace air filter 5-17
–
Black diesel engine smoke switch or gage
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b410.fm 4-3

Troubleshooting
Notes:
4-4 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b410.fm

Maintenance
Maintenance
5 Maintenance
5.1 Notice on maintenance and service work
Maintenance personnel
Operational readiness and the service life of the wheel loader are heavily dependent
on maintenance.
• Daily and weekly servicing and maintenance must be performed by a
specifically trained operator - see Maintenance plan on page 5-62
• All other maintenance that is not described in this Operator’s Manual must be
performed only by the trained and qualified personnel of an authorized
Wacker Neuson service center
• The manufacturer shall not be liable for damage or personal injury caused by
failure to observe the specific information and descriptions
• Please contact your dealer if you require more information on maintenance
IMPORTANT
Refer to the maintenance plan for maintenance
- see Maintenance plan on page 5-62.
• Ensure that only original spare parts are used for repairs.
• The machine’s permits, certifications, registrations, etc., may be withdrawn if
machine parts/components with a prescribed condition or quality, or machine
parts/components that can put persons at risk during operation, are
subsequently modified or exchanged.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-1

Maintenance
Important information on maintenance

• Observe all risk indications and safety instructions given in this Operator’s
Manual.
• Follow the maintenance and safety instructions given in the Operator’s Manuals
of the attachments.
WARNING
Crushing hazard. An unsecured or incorrectly supported telescopic boom can
be lowered unintentionally.
☞ Do not perform assembly work and maintenance on the telescopic boom
if it is raised but not secured.
☞ Secure the loader unit with an appropriate prop or support to prevent it from
being lowered unintentionally.
☞ Follow the safety instructions given in chapter 2 “SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”
of this Operator’s Manual.
☞ Also follow the specific instructions given in the Operator’s Manuals of
the attachments.
WARNING
Injury hazard due to a hot or running engine.
☞ Do not perform work on a hot and running diesel engine.
☞ Wear protective gloves and clothing
Preparations before maintenance or repair

☞ Park the machine on level ground
☞ Stop the engine, but leave the starter switched on
☞ Lower the loader unit to the ground
☞ Let the engine cool down
☞ Open the engine cover
☞ Switch off the battery master switch (option) - see Battery master switch (option) on
page 3-20
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect oil or fuel as it drains and dispose of it in an
environmentally friendly manner.
5-2 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.2 Safety prop for loader unit (option)

Installing the safety prop
The safety prop (option) is located in the cabin access on the left.
CAUTION
B
A Crushing hazard. Injury hazard. Do not perform assembly work and
maintenance on the loader unit if it is raised and not secured
☞ Install safety prop A over the piston rod on the extended lift cylinder
and secure it with lock pin C and split pin B (see figure)
C
☞ Empty and remove the attachment

☞ Raise the loader unit
☞ Stop the engine and remove the starting key
☞ Pull out split pins B
☞ Remove lock pin C and safety prop A
☞ Slide safety prop A from below over the piston rod
of the extended lift cylinder and turn it upward 180°
☞ Install lock pin C and secure it split pin B
CAUTION
Install it as shown in order to avoid damage to the piston rod and the safety
prop.
☞ Carefully lower the loader unit (without pressure) onto the safety prop A
☞ Once maintenance is over, remove safety prop A and put it back in its storage place
Fig. 178 : Safety prop for loader unit (in the cabin access on the left)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-3

Maintenance
5.3 Fuel system

Safety instructions for refueling
WARNING
Extreme caution is essential when handling fuel – increased fire hazard!
☞ Never perform work on the fuel system near open flames or sparks!
☞ Do not smoke when working on the fuel system or when refueling!
☞ Keep the machine clean to reduce the fire hazard and wipe away
fuel spills immediately.
☞ Before refueling, stop the engine and remove the starting key!
☞ Apply the parking brake!
☞ Do not refuel in closed rooms!
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect the fuel as it drains and dispose
of it in an environmentally friendly manner!
Diesel fuel specification
NOTICE: Using unsuitable diesel fuels causes damage to the engine.

☞ Use only the diesel fuels specified in the table!
☞ When adding additives to the diesel fuel, use only the ones authorized by DEUTZ
IMPORTANT
If other fuels are used, warranty rights shall not apply in case of diesel
engine damage (guarantee)!
Please contact your dealer if you require more information on fuel and
additives
Cetane
Grade Use
number
No. 2-D according to EN 590 (EU)
For normal outside temperatures
No. 2-D ASTM D975-94 (USA)
Min. 45 For outside temperatures below 4 °C
No. 1-D according to EN 590 (EU)
(39 °F) or for operation above 1500 m
No. 1-D ASTM D975-94 (USA)
(4900 ft) altitude
5-4 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Stationary fuel pumps

General
Only refuel from stationary fuel pumps. Fuel from barrels or cans is usually dirty.
Even the smallest particles of dirt can cause
• Increased engine wear
• Malfunctions in the fuel system and
• Reduced effectiveness of the fuel filters.
Wrong ✗ Refueling from barrels
If refueling from barrels cannot be avoided, note the following points:
• Barrels must neither be rolled nor tilted before refueling
• Protect the suction pipe opening of the barrel pump with a fine-mesh screen
Right ✓ • Immerse the suction pipe into the barrel so that the distance between the tube
and the bottom of the barrel is 15 cm (6 in).
• Only fill the tank using refueling aids (funnels or filler pipes) with integral microfilter
Fig. 179 : Refueling from a barrel • Keep all refueling containers clean at all times
Refueling
The filler inlet of the fuel tank is located on the left side of the machine
WARNING
Fire and fume inhalation hazards.
☞ Do not refuel in closed rooms.
☞ Never perform maintenance or repair work on the fuel system near
open flames or sparks.
☞ Never smoke when working on the fuel system or when refueling.
☞ Before refueling, stop the engine and remove the starting key.
Fig. 180 : Fuel filler inlet
☞ Wipe away fuel spills immediately.
☞ Remove spilled fuel from the machine components and surfaces before
use to reduce the fire hazard.

☞ Carefully clean the area around the filler opening on the fuel tank
☞ Unscrew the filler cap and refuel
➥ Capacity – see chapter 5 “Fluids and lubricants” on page 5-59
IMPORTANT
Fuel may be drained and the fuel tank may be cleaned only by an
authorized service center.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-5

Maintenance
Bleeding the fuel system

Bleed the fuel system in the following cases:
• After removing and fitting the fuel filter, prefilter or the fuel lines back on again
• After running the fuel tank empty
• After running the engine again, after it has been out of operation for a longer period
of time
WARNING
A
Fire and burn hazard. Draining fuel can ignite if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts or the exhaust system. Hot fuel can cause burns.
☞ Always wear protective equipment and safety glasses when working with fuel.
☞ Never bleed the fuel system if the engine is hot.
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect the fuel as it drains and dispose of it in an
B
Fig. 181 : Bleeding the fuel system ☞ Apply the parking brake
page 3-20
☞ Fill the fuel tank
☞ Remove the servicing lid below on the engine vat
☞ Place a container under the engine to collect the fuel
☞ Loosen bleed screw A on the injection pump by a few turns
☞ Press button B on the fuel pump with your hand (pumping movement) until the fuel
comes out free of air from the loosened bleed screw A
☞ Tighten bleed screw A
☞ Switch on the battery master switch (option) - see Battery master switch (option) on
page 3-20
If the engine runs smoothly for a while, and then stops; or if it does not run smoothly:
☞ Stop the engine
☞ Bleed the fuel system again as described above
IMPORTANT
Have the fuel system checked by an authorized service center if necessary.
5-6 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Checking/cleaning the additional fuel filter (water separator, option)

The additional fuel filter is mounted on the engine near the air filter
Drain the condensation water every 50 operating hours as follows:
A
Fig. 182 : Checking the additional fuel filter page 3-20
☞ Remove the servicing lid below on the engine vat
☞ Place a container to collect the fuel
☞ Open stop cock A on the additional fuel filter and drain the condensation water
☞ Close stop cock A on the additional fuel filter
☞ Start the diesel engine and check the additional fuel filter for leaks
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect the fuel as it drains and dispose of it in an
IMPORTANT
Have repair work on the fuel system performed only by an authorized service
center!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-7

Maintenance
5.4 Engine lubrication system

Safety instructions regarding inspections and maintenance on the engine
WARNING
Burn hazard! Do not perform maintenance on a hot engine!
☞ Pay attention to the warning label
☞ Wait at least 10 minutes after stopping the engine
Fig. 183 : Label: hot surface
IMPORTANT
After switching off the engine, wait at least 10 minutes before checking
the oil level!
– Check the engine oil level every 10 operating hours or once a day!
– Check the oil level before beginning work!
– Do not check the oil level if the engine is running!
Checking the oil level once a day

NOTICE: Possible machine damage. If the engine oil level is too low or if
an oil change is overdue, this can cause engine damage or loss of power.
max
min
☞ Have the oil changed by an authorized service center
- see Maintenance plan on page 5-62

– see chapter 3 “Putting the machine out of operation” on page 3-51
A ☞ Lower the loader unit to the ground
Fig. 184 : Checking the oil level ☞ Switch off the starter
☞ Pull out oil dipstick A and wipe it with a lint-free cloth
☞ Push oil dipstick A in as far as possible and pull it out again
☞ Read off the oil level
☞ Add oil if necessary, however when the oil reaches the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick A at the latest - see Adding engine oil on page 5-9
5-8 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Adding engine oil
NOTICE: Possible engine damage from too much oil or incorrect engine oil.
☞ Do not add engine oil above the MAX mark of oil dipstick A
☞ Use only the specified engine oil - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect the engine oil as it drains and dispose
of it in an environmentally friendly manner!

B ☞ Let the engine cool down
A ☞ Clean the area around oil filler cap B with a lint-free cloth
☞ Open filler cap B
Fig. 185 : Oil dipstick and oil filler cap
☞ Pull out oil dipstick A and wipe it with a lint-free cloth
☞ Add engine oil
➥ Wait a moment until all the oil has run into the oil sump
☞ Check the oil level with oil dipstick A
- see Checking the oil level once a day on page 5-8
☞ Add oil if necessary and check the oil level again
☞ Close filler cap B
☞ Push oil dipstick A back in as far as possible
☞ Completely remove all oil spills from the engine
5.5 Washer system reservoir

Refilling washer fluid
Reservoir filler inlet 34 is located in the cabin to the left of the operator seat.
IMPORTANT
34 Add clean tap water only!
Add a suitable cleaning agent if required.
In winter: add antifreeze for washer systems to the water.
Refer to the antifreeze instructions for further information on concentrations.
Fig. 186 : Reservoir for washer system
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-9

Maintenance
5.6 Engine and hydraulics cooling system

The combined oil/water radiator cools the diesel engine and the hydraulic oil of the drive
and operating hydraulics.
The coolant reservoir is located at the rear on the radiator.
Safety instructions regarding cooling system maintenance
WARNING
Burn hazard. The coolant in the system is hot under normal operating
conditions and under about 1 bar (15 psi) pressure.
☞ Never open the coolant reservoir or drain coolant if the engine is hot.
☞ Wait at least 10 minutes after stopping the engine.
☞ Wear safety glasses, protective gloves and clothing.
☞ Always actuate the safety valve in the filler cap of the coolant reservoir first.
To do this: Unscrew the filler cap to the first notch and release the pressure
- see Adding coolant on page 5-14.
☞ Never add cold water/coolant if the engine is warm
WARNING
Risk of swallowing antifreeze and of chemical burns when handling antifreeze.
Therefore:
☞ Keep antifreeze out of reach of children
☞ Seek medical attention immediately if antifreeze has been swallowed
5-10 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
NOTICE: Dirt on the radiator fins or damage to them reduces the radiator’s heat
dissipation capacity and can cause damage to the engine and the hydraulic system.
Therefore:
☞ Check the radiator once a day for dirt and clean it if necessary
☞ In dusty or dirty work conditions, clean more frequently than indicated in the
maintenance plan
☞ Do not damage the radiator fins as you clean them with a compressed-air gun
NOTICE: An insufficient coolant level reduces the heat dissipation capacity and can
cause engine damage. Therefore:
☞ Check the coolant level at regular intervals
☞ Inspection intervals - see Maintenance plan on page 5-62
☞ After filling the coolant reservoir, make a test run with the engine and check the
coolant level again after stopping the engine
NOTICE: The use of the wrong coolant can destroy the engine and the radiator.
Therefore:
☞ Add enough antifreeze to the coolant.
☞ Use brand-name antifreeze compounds with anticorrosion additives
- see Coolant compound table on page 6-9
☞ Do not use radiator cleaning compounds if an antifreeze compound has been added
to the coolant – otherwise this causes sludge to form that can damage the engine
• If the coolant must be replaced frequently, have the cooling system checked for leaks
by an authorized service center!
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect the coolant as it drains and dispose of it in
an environmentally friendly manner!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-11

Maintenance
Temperature indicator: diesel engine coolant

Indicator light 48 on the indicating instrument (with acoustic warning) monitors the
cooling system.
48
NOTICE: The temperature must be between +80 °C (176 °F) and +105 °C (221 °F)
in order to avoid engine damage.
The max. engine temperature allowed is +110 °C (230 °F).
☞ An alarm sounds if the engine temperature is +115 °C (239 °F) or higher
☞ To cool down: let the engine run at idling speed briefly, then stop it
☞ The alarm does not sound any longer if the engine temperature is +110 °C (230 °F)
or lower
☞ Check the cooling system
Fig. 187 : Temperature indicator
5-12 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Fig. 188 : Label: hot fluid (coolant)
To do this: Unscrew the filler cap to the first notch and release the pressure.
IMPORTANT
Check the coolant level every 10 operating hours or once a day.
Check before starting the engine.

A ☞ Stop the engine, but leave the starter switched on
MAX
☞ Allow the engine/cooling system to cool down
MIN
☞ Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir A
If the coolant level is below the MIN mark of the coolant reservoir:
Fig. 189 : Coolant reservoir
Add coolant up to the MAX mark - see Adding coolant on page 5-14
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-13

Maintenance
Adding coolant
WARNING
Fig. 190 : Label: hot fluid (coolant) ☞ Wear safety glasses, protective gloves and clothing.
To do this: Unscrew the filler cap to the first notch and release the pressure.

A ☞ Lower the loader unit to the ground
MAX ☞ Let the engine cool down
MIN ☞ Open the engine cover
☞ Release the overpressure in the coolant reservoir.
To do this: open cap A to the first notch and release the pressure
☞ Open filler cap A fully
Fig. 191 : Adding coolant in the coolant reservoir ☞ Add coolant up to the MAX mark
• Use brand-name antifreeze compounds with anticorrosion additives
- see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
☞ Close filler cap A
☞ Start and warm up the engine
☞ Open the heating circuit fully
☞ Stop the engine
☞ Check the cooling system and the heating water circuit for leaks
• If necessary, have leaks immediately repaired by an authorized service center
• Check the coolant level again
☞ If necessary, add coolant and repeat the procedure until reaching the correct coolant
level
☞ Check the coolant quality (antifreeze) with suitable testing equipment (antifreeze tester)
- see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59 and - see Coolant compound table on page 6-9
Environment
Use a suitable container to collect the coolant as it drains and dispose of it in
an environmentally friendly manner.
5-14 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Cleaning the radiator fins of the oil/water radiator
WARNING
Burn hazard due to hot engine or radiator.
Fig. 192 : Label: hot surface

NOTICE: Dirt on the radiator fins reduces the radiator’s heat dissipation capacity
and can cause damage to the engine and the hydraulic system!
In order to ensure the radiator’s optimal cooling capacity, do not damage the radiator
fins as you clean them with a compressed-air gun!
☞ Check the radiator once a day for dirt and clean it if necessary
☞ Clean the radiator more frequently in dusty or dirty work conditions
☞ Do not damage the radiator fins as you clean them with a compressed-air gun

page 3-20
Fig. 193 : Cleaning the oil cooler ☞ Clean the radiator fins by blowing compressed air outward from the engine side
☞ Remove dirt in the intake area of the radiator
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-15

Maintenance
5.7 Air filter

Checking the air filter for dirt
Maintenance display B on the filter housing monitors the filter cartridge.
The dust is removed with dust valve E.
NOTICE: Bear in mind the following to avoid premature engine wear!

☞ Do not wash, brush or clean filter cartridge D with compressed air
☞ Replace filter cartridge D when indicator light illuminates
☞ Replace a damaged filter cartridge D by a new one
☞ Ensure cleanliness when replacing filter cartridge D
NOTICE: Filter cartridge degradation. Filter cartridges degrade prematurely in

environments with acidic air, such as acid production facilities, steel and aluminum mills,
E
chemical plants and other nonferrous-metal plants.
☞ Replace filter cartridge D and safety cartridge F at the latest after 500 operating hours
- see Replacing the air filter cartridge on page 5-17!
A B C
page 3-20
☞ Squeeze dust valve E
☞ Remove hardened dust by compressing the upper area of the valve
☞ Clean the discharge slot if necessary
☞ Filter cartridge D must be replaced if:
E • If the red mark C in maintenance display B is visible
D • At the latest after 1500 operating hours (however once every year) - see Replacing
F the air filter cartridge on page 5-17
Fig. 194 : Air filter with safety cartridge

IMPORTANT
For applications in dusty environment, the air filter is fitted with an extra
safety cartridge F (standard). Do not clean the safety cartridge.
Replace the safety cartridge every third time maintenance is performed!
5-16 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Replacing the air filter cartridge

H ☞ Stop the engine, but leave the starter switched on
G
K ☞ Switch off the starter and remove the starting key
307b0700.ai
page 3-20
Fig. 195 : Removing the lower housing section ☞ Fold both bow hooks G to the outside, off the notch of the upper housing section H
☞ Remove the lower housing section K
☞ Carefully remove filter cartridge D with slightly turning movements
H D In addition, every 3rd time the filter is replaced, carefully remove the safety cartridge
F with slightly turning movements
NOTICE: Bear in mind the following to avoid premature engine wear:

☞ Ensure that all contamination (dust) inside the upper and lower housing sections
307b0710.ai
has been removed
☞ Carefully insert new safety cartridge F into the upper housing section H
☞ Carefully insert new filter cartridge D into the upper housing section H
☞ Clean the dust valve - see Checking the air filter for dirt on page 5-16
☞ Position lower housing section K (ensure that it is properly seated)
☞ Fold and close bow hooks G on the notch of the upper housing section H
F
Fig. 196 : Removing the filter element
After replacing the filter:

A B C ☞ Reset the red mark C in maintenance display B
☞ Press reset button A
Fig. 197 : Air filter with maintenance display
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-17

Maintenance
5.8 V-belt
Checking V-belt tension
WARNING
Crushing, cutting or burn hazards.
☞ Stop the engine and let it cool down. Wait until the engine is comfortable
to touch.
☞ Only check, retighten or replace the V-belt when the engine is stopped.
☞ Disconnect the battery or the battery master switch before proceeding with
work on the V-belt.
NOTICE: Cracked and stretched V-belts cause engine damage

☞ Replace the V-belt every 2 years at the latest - see Maintenance plan on page 5-62
☞ Have the V-belt replaced by an authorized Wacker Neuson service center
Check the V-belt once a day or every 10 operating hours and retighten if necessary!
Retighten new V-belts after about 15 minutes of running time.
Check as follows:
About 10 mm ☞ Stop the engine, but leave the starter switched on
1 ☞ Lower the loader unit to the ground
Fig. 198 : Checking V-belt tension ☞ Open the engine cover
page 3-20
☞ Carefully inspect V-belt 1 for damage
☞ If the V-belt is damaged:
➥ Have the V-belt replaced by authorized personnel
☞ Press with your thumb to check whether the V-belt can be deflected between the
pulleys by no more than about 10 mm (0.39 in)
☞ Retighten the V-belt if necessary
5-18 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Retightening the V-belt

Retighten as follows:
4 ☞ Park the machine on level ground
A ☞ Apply the parking brake
3 ☞ Let the engine cool down
Fig. 199 : Retightening the V-belt page 3-20
☞ Loosen fastening screws 3 of alternator 4
☞ Use a suitable tool to push alternator 4 in the direction of arrow A until the correct
V-belt tension is obtained (fig. 198)
☞ Keep alternator 4 in this position, and at the same time retighten fastening screws 3
☞ Check V-belt tension (fig. 198) after about 15 minutes
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-19

Maintenance
5.9 Hydraulic system

Specific safety instructions regarding the hydraulic system
WARNING
Hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure can catch fire, damage property,
penetrate the skin, and cause serious burns and injury.
☞ Do not operate the machine with leaking or damaged hydraulic system
components.
☞ Do not perform maintenance on a hot engine and hydraulic system.
Wait at least 10 minutes after stopping the engine.
☞ Wear safety glasses to protect the eyes. If oil contacts the eye flush
immediately with clean water and seek emergency medical treatment.
☞ Release the pressure in all lines carrying hydraulic oil prior to any
maintenance and repair work. To do this:
• Lower all hydraulically controlled attachments to the ground and
stop the engine
• Move all control levers of the hydraulic control valves several times
☞ Use a piece of cardboard to diagnose the source of hydraulic leaks.
☞ Seek immediate medical attention if oil penetrates the skin. Oil can cause
serious infections.
NOTICE: Contaminated hydraulic oil, lack of oil or the wrong hydraulic oil can seriously
damage the hydraulic system.
☞ Take care to avoid dirt when working!
☞ Always add hydraulic oil using the filling screen - see Adding hydraulic oil on page 5-24!
☞ Only use authorized oils of the same type - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
☞ Always add hydraulic oil before the level gets too low
☞ If the hydraulic system is filled with biodegradable oil, then only use biodegradable
oil of the same type for filling up – observe the sticker on the hydraulic oil reservoir!
☞ Contact customer service if the hydraulic system filter is contaminated with metal
chippings. Otherwise, follow-on damage can result!
☞ If the hydraulic oil in the sight glass is cloudy, this indicates that water or air has
penetrated the hydraulic system. This can cause damage to the hydraulic pump!
Contact your Wacker Neuson dealer immediately
Environment
Collect drained hydraulic oil and biodegradable oil in a suitable container!
Dispose of drained oil and used filters by an ecologically safe method. Always
contact the relevant authorities or commercial establishments in charge of oil
disposal before disposing of biodegradable oil.
• Apply the parking brake to prevent the machine from rolling away before you perform
servicing and maintenance
5-20 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Instructions for preparing maintenance of the hydraulic system

☞ Proceed as follows before starting maintenance on the hydraulic system:
• Park the machine on level ground
• Lower the loader unit to the ground
• Lower all hydraulically controlled attachments to the ground
• Stop the engine, but leave the starter switched on
• Apply the parking brake
• After stopping the diesel engine, release the pressure in the hydraulic system.
To do this: move all control levers of the hydraulic control valves repeatedly
– see chapter 3 “Pressure relief on the quick couplers and the quickhitch” on page 3-
71
– see chapter 3 ““plus powerflow” operation (switchable pressure relief valve)
(option)” on page 3-72
• Switch off the starter and remove the starting key
• Let the engine cool down
• Open the engine cover
• Switch off the battery master switch (option) - see Battery master switch (option) on
page 3-20
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-21

Maintenance
Monitoring the hydraulic oil return filter

Two indicator lights on the indicating instrument monitor the return filter (dirt) and the oil
44
temperature
43 • Indicator light 43 oil temperature
• indicator light 44 return filter flow (dirt)
Indicator light illuminates Remedy

☞ Check the hydraulic oil level (not enough
The operating temperature oil in the reservoir)
43 of the hydraulic oil is too ☞ The filter element or the hydraulic oil is
high! dirty and must be replaced by an
authorized service center
Fig. 200 : Preheating start switch
The flow resistance in the ☞ The filter element is dirty and must be
44
return filter is too high! replaced by an authorized service center
IMPORTANT
Indicator light 43 on the indicating instrument can illuminate in cold weather
immediately after starting the engine. This is caused by increased oil viscosity.
In this case:
• Set engine speed so that the indicator light goes out
• Bear in mind the instructions concerning warmup – see chapter 3 “Starting the
engine” on page 3-31
5-22 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Checking the hydraulic oil level
WARNING
Burn hazard! Do not perform maintenance on a hot engine and hydraulic
system!

☞ Retract all hydraulic cylinders
✓ A ☞ Stop the engine
☞ Switch off the battery master switch (option)- see Battery master switch (option) on
page 3-20
☞ Check the hydraulic oil level in sight glass A
Fig. 201 : Oil level sight glass on the hydraulic oil reservoir
• If the oil level is visible in the lower half of the oil level sight glass
➥ OK
• If the oil level is not visible in the oil level sight glass:
➥ Not enough oil
☞ Add hydraulic oil - see Adding hydraulic oil on page 5-24
IMPORTANT
If the hydraulic oil in the sight glass is cloudy, this indicates that water or air
has penetrated the hydraulic system.
Have the hydraulic system immediately checked by an authorized service
center!
Environment
Any excess quantity of hydraulic oil in the reservoir escapes via the breather
as soon as the temperature rises!
If the oil level is no longer visible in the upper half of the oil level sight glass:
• Drain hydraulic oil in order to avoid damage to the environment!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-23

Maintenance
Adding hydraulic oil
WARNING
Burn hazard! Do not perform maintenance on a hot engine and hydraulic
system!
IMPORTANT
Do not add hydraulic oil unless the engine is stopped. Otherwise the hydraulic
oil runs out of the filler opening

B ☞ Retract all hydraulic cylinders
☞ Stop the engine
page 3-20
☞ Clean the area around the filler and breather filter B with a cloth
Fig. 202 : Filler cap for hydraulic oil reservoir
☞ Place a container to collect the oil as it drains
☞ Open breather filter B by hand
☞ Put the filter insert (filter)
☞ Add hydraulic oil
• Use only authorized oils - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
☞ Check the hydraulic oil level in the oil level sight glass (fig. 201/A)
☞ Add if necessary and check again
☞ Firmly close breather filter B by hand
Environment
Any excess quantity of hydraulic oil in the reservoir escapes via the breather
as soon as the temperature rises!
If the oil level is no longer visible in the upper half of the oil level sight glass:
• Drain hydraulic oil in order to avoid damage to the environment!
5-24 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Important information on the use of biodegradable oil

• Use only the biodegradable hydraulic fluids which have been tested and approved
by Wacker Neuson GmbH - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59. Always contact
Wacker Neuson for the use of other products that have not been recommended.
In addition, ask the oil supplier for a written declaration of guarantee. This guarantee
is applicable to damage occurring on the hydraulic components that can be proved to
be due to the hydraulic fluid
• Use only biodegradable oil of the same type for adding oil. In order to avoid misunder-
standings, a label providing clear information is located on the hydraulic oil reservoir
(next to the filler inlet) regarding the type of oil currently used! Replace missing labels!
Replace missing labels!
The joint use of two different biodegradable oils can affect the quality of one of the
oil types. Therefore, ensure that the remaining amount of initial hydraulic fluid in the
hydraulic system does not exceed 8 % when changing biodegradable oil
(manufacturer indications)
• Do not add mineral oil – the content of mineral oil should not exceed 2 % in order to
avoid foaming problems and to ensure biological degradability
• When running the machine with biodegradable oil, the same oil and filter replacement
intervals are valid as for mineral oil – see maintenance plans in the appendix
• Have the condensation water in the hydraulic oil reservoir drained by an authorized
Wacker Neuson service center every 500 operating hours, in any case before the
cold season. The water content must not exceed 0.1 % by weight
• The instructions in this Operator’s Manual concerning environmental protection are
also valid for the use of biodegradable oil
• If additional hydraulic attachments are installed or operated, use the same type of
biodegradable oil for these attachments to avoid mixtures in the hydraulic system.
IMPORTANT
Subsequent change from mineral oil to biodegradable oil must be performed
by an authorized Wacker Neuson service center or by your Wacker Neuson
dealer
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-25

Maintenance
5.10 Checking hydraulic pressure lines

Safety instructions regarding pressure line checks
WARNING
Pressurized hydraulic oil hazard. Hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure
can catch fire, damage property, penetrate the skin, and cause serious burns
and injury.
☞ Do not operate the machine with leaking or damaged hydraulic system
components.
☞ Identify the cause for the hydraulic leaks with a piece of cardboard,
paper or wood, but never use an open flame or light.
☞ Hydraulic oil can be hot and can cause serious burns if contact is made
with skin. If contact occurs with hot oil, seek immediate medical attention
and treatment for the burn.
☞ Wear safety glasses to protect the eyes. If oil contacts the eye flush
immediately with clean water and seek emergency medical treatment.
☞ Retighten leaking screwed fittings and hose connections only when the
system is not under pressure. Release the pressure before working on
pressurized lines.
☞ Never weld or solder damaged or leaking pressure lines and threaded
fittings. Replace damaged parts with new ones.
☞ Never search for leaks with your bare hands, but wear protective gloves.
☞ Have the malfunctioning hydraulic lines replaced by an authorized Wacker
Neuson technician.
The entrepreneur/owner of the machine must ensure that flexible lines are replaced in
appropriate intervals, even if no safety-relevant malfunctions can been detected on the
flexible line.
Flexible lines must be inspected by a technician (competent person) before the first
commissioning, and then at least once a year for safe working condition.
• Leaks and damaged pressure lines must be immediately repaired or replaced
by an authorized service center. This not only increases the operating safety of
your machine but also helps to protect the environment
• Replace hydraulic hoses every 6 years from the date of manufacture, even if they
do not seem to be damaged
In this respect, we recommend that you observe all the relevant safety regulations for
1 Q/08 hydraulic lines, as well as the safety regulations regarding accident prevention and
occupational health and safety in your country. Also observe DIN 20066, part 5.
The date of manufacture (month or quarter and year) is indicated on the flexible line.
Example:
The indication “1 Q/08” means manufactured in the 1st quarter of 2008.
5-26 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.11 Lubrication work

NOTICE: Wrong lubricants cause damage at the lubrication points
☞ In order to avoid damage to the lubrication points, use only lithium-saponified
brand-name grease - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
Lubricating the rear axle oscillation-type bearing
IMPORTANT
The machine has an oscillation-type rear axle. Grease the bearing at the
latest after every 50 operating hours or once a week.
A ☞ Park the machine on level ground

Fig. 203 : Grease nipples for oscillation-type bearing ☞ Apply the parking brake
☞ Lubricate grease nipple A of the oscillation-type bearing
Lubricating the front and rear axle planetary drive bearings

B ☞ Lubricate grease nipples B (2 x) on each planetary drive bearing
every 50 operating hours or once a week
Fig. 204 : Grease nipples on planetary drive bearings
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-27

Maintenance
5.12 Lubrication work on the telescopic boom

Preparations for lubrication and spraying
NOTICE: Wrong lubricants cause damage at the lubrication points
☞ In order to avoid damage to the lubrication points, use only lithium-saponified
brand-name grease - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
Environment
When spraying oil onto the machine, position it only on surfaces with
oil separators.
When applying spray oil, place a container to collect the oil as it drips.
If possible, use biodegradable oil for spraying
☞ Park the machine on level ground with an oil separator

☞ Raise the loader unit so you can lubricate it comfortably from the ground
without any risk
☞ Fully extend the telescopic boom
- see Raising/extending the telescopic boom on page 3-73
☞ Stop the engine
5-28 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Spraying oil onto the slide plates after a salt application (spray lance)
B B
B B
C
C
Fig. 205 : Spraying oil onto the slide plates
NOTICE: Risk of corrosion on the slide plates of the telescopic boom

☞ Apply an oil coating to the slide plates after washing and drying the telescopic boom
- see Cleaning the exterior of the machine on page 5-52
IMPORTANT
Only have an authorized service center apply oil to the slide plates with a
spray lance.
Environment
If possible, use biodegradable oil for spraying
☞ Caution! Extend the telescopic boom completely before spraying oil, see arrow A
☞ Spray oil onto all lateral, upper and lower slide plates B inside the telescopic boom
☞ Spray oil onto all lateral, upper and lower slide plates C outside the telescopic boom
☞ Check the quantity of sprayed oil: the spray oil must neither run nor drip
☞ Retract and extend the telescopic boom several times
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-29

Maintenance
Lubricating the telescopic boom
B A
B
A
B
Fig. 206 : Lubrication points of telescopic boom
If the wheel loader is in uninterrupted use

☞ Fully extend the telescopic boom
☞ Tilt out the quickhitch horizontally
☞ Stop the diesel engine and remove the starting key
☞ Apply grease to the grease nipples (circles) and to the slide plates B
every 10 operating hours or once a day
If the wheel loader is in occasional use
☞ Apply grease to the grease nipples (circles) and to slide plates B
every 50 operating hours or once a week
Recommended lubricant - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59.
Checking the wear pads
IMPORTANT
The (green) wear pads are located between the inner and outer boom
sections. The wear pads can be readjusted as they wear down – to a minimum
thickness of 6 mm (0.24 in) only – by means of set screws A. Replace the
wear pads if they are below the minimum thickness! The wear pads may
only be adjusted or replaced by an authorized Wacker Neuson service center.
5-30 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.13 Lubricating with the central lubrication system (option)

General functional description of the central lubrication system
The central lubrication system allows you to lubricate all lubrication points of the wheel
loader in one single step.
• The yellow LED or the green indicator light in the cabin (option) illuminates for 1.5
seconds upon switching on the starter to indicate functional readiness of the controls
(switch-on check). It stays lit during the entire lubrication procedure.
• The integrated electronic control unit has a data memory for saving the times that have
been set or that have elapsed. The time is taken and saved if the starter is switched
off during lubrication or during a break. The remaining lubrication time or break time is
read from the memory upon switching the starter on again, and lubrication is resumed
where it was interrupted.
Time control
Break and lubrication times can be set with the time-dependent control of the central
lubrication system. Break times are the periods between two lubrication times
- see Setting the lubrication and break times on page 5-32.
IMPORTANT
Pressing push button A (on the side of the pump) starts intermediate lubrication
at any given time if the starter is switched on. This also serves as a functional
check.
A • The pump then immediately starts with a lubrication cycle. The lubrication or
break time that has elapsed so far or that has been saved is reset and starts
over again.
Fig. 207 : Central lubrication system push button
• A lubrication system malfunction can also be reset by pressing push button
A, and the pump restarts lubrication.
Repair work
Repair work on the central lubrication system may be performed only by an authorized
service center!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-31

Maintenance
Setting the lubrication and break times

Break times and lubrication times are set with the notched switches S and P in the window
of the controls.
Break time ☞ Remove the red frame on the protective motor housing of the pump with a flat
screwdriver to set the time
Lubrication
☞ Loosen the four cross-slotted screws and remove the transparent cover
☞ Set the break time P and the lubrication time S with a flat screwdriver
Lubrication times (S):
➥ 1 to 16 minutes (16 notches, 1 minute each)
➥ 2 to 32 minutes (16 notches, 2 minutes each)
Break time (P):
➥ 0.5 to 8 h (16 notches, 0.5 h each)
S P L Yellow LED (L)
➥ (B) lubrication system in operation
➥ (A) lubrication in progress: 0.5 seconds LED ON/0.5 seconds LED OFF
B
☞ Install the transparent cover (window) once the settings are performed.
A
NOTICE: Possible machine damage. Water can penetrate into the controls and
Fig. 208 : Setting the lubrication times damage them if the transparent cover is not closed correctly.
☞ After setting the lubrication and break times, ensure that the transparent cover
is fitted and closed correctly.
Filling the central lubrication system

The lubrication system is filled via conical grease nipple 1 or a fill coupling with a manual
or pneumatic grease gun.
1
NOTICE: Unsuitable greases can cause damage to the lubrication system or lubrication
points.
☞ Only commercially available greases up to NLGI-Kl. 2 are certified for use.
☞ - see Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
IMPORTANT
Only fill up to the maximum level in order to ensure the ventilation of the
Fig. 209 : Filling the central lubrication system central lubrication system.
5-32 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.14 Maintenance of the braking system

Safety instructions regarding the brake system
Brakes are crucial to safety. Incorrect work can cause brake failure.
Therefore all maintenance and repair work on the brakes must be performed by
a qualified technician. An exception to this is the following work that must be performed
by the operator of the telescopic loader:
☞ Daily check of the level in the brake fluid reservoir!
☞ Daily check of the brake lines
WARNING
Brake malfunctions are possible.
Fig. 210 : Checking the brake fluid level in the reservoir
☞ Damaged brake lines or hoses must immediately be replaced by an
authorized service center.
Checking/adding brake fluid

The brake fluid reservoir is located at the front left in the cabin (near the brake/inching pedal)
A
WARNING
There is a risk of reduced braking effect or of brake malfunctions.
An incorrect brake fluid grade or an insufficient brake fluid level can
impair the operational readiness of the braking system.
MAX
☞ Check the brake fluid in the reservoir at regular intervals
MIN ☞ Add brake fluid up to the upper edge of the sight glass
☞ The brake fluid must comply with the SAE specification
Fig. 211 : Checking the brake fluid level in the reservoir
☞ The brake fluid must be replaced every 2 years by an authorized
Wacker Neuson service center.
☞ If the braking system loses too much brake fluid, have the braking system
checked and repaired by an authorized Wacker Neuson service center.
If the level is below the upper edge of the sight glass:

☞ Clean the area around the opening with a clean cloth
☞ Open reservoir cover A
☞ Add brake fluid up to the upper edge of the sight glass MAX
☞ Close reservoir cover A
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-33

Maintenance
5.15 Tires
Daily tire checks
WARNING
Injury hazard due to incorrect tire or rim repairs.
☞ All repair work on tires and rims may only be performed by authorized
service centers.
IMPORTANT
Regular inspections of the tires
• Improve operating safety
• Increase the service life of the tires
• Reduce machine downtimes
• Refer to the table in chapter “Technical data” on page 6-8 for the
authorized tire types and the correct tire pressures. Machines are also
delivered ex works with a tire table sticker on the front window or on the
Fig. 212 : Tire table telescopic boom bulkhead.
☞ Check tire pressure

• Refer to the label (on the front window) or – see chapter 6 “Tires” on page 6-8
☞ Check tires and rims for damage (cracks, ageing etc.) – also on the inside
☞ Remove foreign bodies from the tire tread
☞ Remove traces of oil and grease from the tires
5-34 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Safety instructions regarding wheel change
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. Using wrong tires or wheels can cause accidents
on public roads and construction sites.
☞ Use only wheels and tires authorized for your machine
– see chapter 6 “Tires” on page 6-8
☞ Check the wheel nuts for tightness after every wheel or tire change
– see chapter 6 “Tightening torques” on page 6-10
WARNING
Crushing and injury hazard An incorrectly raised machine can tip over.
☞ Use only jacks that have been certified for the machine
☞ After raising the machine, install additional safety elements (trestles)
☞ Seal off the job site and ensure constant supervision of the machine
NOTICE: The wheels are heavy and can damage the threads on the wheel studs
if they are handled incorrectly.
☞ Use suitable assembly tools, such as covering sleeves for the bolts, a jack etc.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-35

Maintenance
Wheel change
Preparing a wheel change
☞ Lower the attachment
☞ Prevent the machine from rolling away
Removing
☞ Slightly loosen the wheel nuts of the wheel you want to remove
☞ Install a jack (certified for the machine) under the axle body ensuring stability
☞ Check the safe position of the jack and raise the machine
☞ Install trestles to ensure safety
☞ Completely remove the wheel nuts
☞ Remove the wheel
Assembly
☞ Place the wheel onto the wheel bolts
☞ Tighten all wheel nuts part-way
☞ Lower the raised axle and remove the jack
☞ Tighten the wheel nuts to the specified tightening torque
– see chapter 6 “Specific tightening torques” on page 6-10
5-36 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.16 Heating and ventilation system maintenance

General notice on the heating system
The heating system of the machine is equipped with a fine-dust filter.
The fine-dust filter cleans the air taken in by the heater.
WARNING
Health hazard!
The volume of warm air flowing out of the air vents decreases as filter
contamination increases. In order to be able to comply with the required
safety measures regarding occupational safety and health:
☞ Clean the fine dust filter regularly
☞ Replace malfunctioning or dirty fine-dust filters
☞ Replace the fine-dust filter at least every 500 operating hours by a new one
- see Maintenance plan on page 5-62
Cleaning the dust filter of the heating system

The fine-dust filter is located behind the maintenance flap on the outside right of the cabin.
A
☞ Open maintenance flap A
☞ Remove fine-dust filter B and check it for damage
☞ Knock fine-dust filter B on a plate on either side
☞ Blow compressed air from the inside to the outside to clean fine-dust filter B, or wash it
with water and dry it
➥ Replace or clean the filter more frequently if the machine is used in severe dust
conditions
☞ Clean the inside of the filter housing and insert the fine-dust filter
(ensure that it is seated properly)
B ☞ Close maintenance flap A
Fig. 213 : Replacing the dust filter of the heating system
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-37

Maintenance
5.17 Air conditioning (option): maintenance

Safety instructions regarding the air conditioning
For your own safety, please bear the following instructions in mind:
Caution
Apply special care during maintenance and repair work – sharp-edged
condenser and heat-exchanger fins can cause injury.
☞ Wear protective equipment (protective gloves and glasses) during
maintenance and repair work.
WARNING
Burn hazard. Lines and hoses carrying refrigerants or coolants can be hot
and are pressurized.
☞ Avoid touching parts containing refrigerants.
☞ Switch off the air conditioning during checks and when performing
maintenance.
WARNING
Explosion hazard. Gases in closed air conditioning systems can explode
during soldering or welding.
☞ Have repair work performed only by an authorized service center with
trained technicians.
• Maintenance and repair work may only be performed by a qualified technician or a

Wacker Neuson service center.
• Do not perform maintenance unless the heating and air conditioning systems are
switched off.
• Bear in mind the pertinent regulations relevant to accident prevention, other generally
acknowledged regulations regarding safety and occupational medicine.
5-38 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Daily functional and visual checks of the air conditioning

Functional and visual checks must be performed by the operator once a day
WARNING
Burn hazard. The engine and the radiator become very hot during
operation and must cool down first before performing maintenance.
☞ After stopping the engine, wait at least 10 minutes before starting
maintenance.
Preparing the daily visual check

☞ Switch off the battery master switch (option)
- see Battery master switch (option) on page 3-20
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-39

Maintenance
Performing the daily visual check

☞ Check the heating and coolant lines for damage
☞ Check the hoses for tightness, leaks and chafing
B ☞ Check the electric connections for correct condition and tightness
☞ Clean the dirty condenser A. To do this:
• Remove fastening screws B
• Fold away condenser A
A
☞ Clean the condenser with compressed air or with a water jet
(do not use high-pressure cleaners)
CAUTION
C
Do not damage the fins as you clean the condenser!
☞ Install condenser A once cleaning is over

☞ Check V-belt tension C and if necessary, retighten the V-belt
• Press with your thumb to check whether the V-belt can be deflected
between the pulleys by no more than about 10 mm (0.39 in) (arrow)
➥ Retighten the V-belt if necessary
- see Retightening the V-belt on page 5-19
☞ Have a malfunctioning V-belt replaced by an authorized service center
NOTICE: The air conditioning system must be checked and serviced

twice a year by trained personnel in an authorized service center!
☞ Replace dehumidifier D every 2 years!
Fig. 214 : Air conditioning: evaporator, dehumidifier
5-40 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.18 Electrical system

Safety instructions regarding the electrical system
WARNING
Chemical burn hazard. The battery contains sulfuric acid.
This acid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin, the eyes,
clothing or the machine. When recharging or working near the battery:
☞ Wear protective gloves, safety glasses and protective clothing with long
sleeves
If acid is spilled:
☞ Do not handle the battery recklessly, causing acid to leak or spill.
☞ Thoroughly wash any part of the body touched by the acid immediately
with plenty of water and seek medical attention at once
☞ Immediately rinse acid splashes in the eyes with clear water for several
minutes! Then seek medical attention at once
☞ Immediately neutralize acid splashes on skin or clothing with an acid
neutralizer or soap, and rinse with plenty of water
☞ Immediately seek medical attention if acid has been swallowed
☞ Thoroughly rinse all affected surfaces immediately with plenty of water
:
WARNING
Explosion hazard. When charging batteries, as well as during normal
operation of batteries, an oxyhydrogen mixture is formed in the battery cells
that can cause explosions or chemical burns! Therefore when recharging
and/or working near the battery:
☞ Open the caps of the battery openings by half a revolution before
recharging the battery
☞ Avoid open flames and sparks and do not smoke near open battery cells,
otherwise gas can ignite
☞ Always disconnect the negative terminal (−) from the battery before
starting repair work on the electrical system!
☞ Switch off the battery master switch (option) and remove the key
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-41

Maintenance
WARNING
Risk of sparking, explosion, damage to property due to incorrect battery
connections
☞ Use only 12 V power sources. Higher voltages will damage the electrical
components
☞ Do not attempt to jump-start the machine if the battery is frozen or if the
acid level is low. The battery can burst or explode!
☞ When connecting the battery leads, ensure that the poles +/− are not
inverted, otherwise sensitive electrical components will be damaged
☞ Spark hazard. Do not interrupt voltage-carrying circuits at the battery
terminals
☞ Do not place tools or other conductive objects on the battery – risk of
short circuit!
☞ Do not add circuits or electrical accessories that exceed the system
capacity.
☞ Do not connect a circuit without a correctly-rated fuse or circuit breaker.
• Maintenance and repair work on the electrical system (including the battery)
may be performed only by trained personnel and/or authorized service centers.
• Putting the machine out of operation
☞ Remove the battery, store it in a dry and frost-free place
☞ If the machine is put out of operation for extended periods, charge the battery
every 2 months or use a battery charge maintainer
☞ Always charge the battery when storing it. An empty battery must be recharged
as soon as possible
• Before putting the machine into operation
☞ Charge the battery and clean the terminals before installing it
• Only use batteries of the specified capacity
– see chapter 6 “Electrical system” on page 6-6
• Dispose of used batteries correctly. For safe transportation to a recycling point,
place the protective cap on the positive terminal of the used battery.
5-42 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Checking/replacing the battery
WARNING
Battery acid hazard. The battery contains highly caustic sulfuric acid.
This acid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin, the eyes,
clothing or the machine
☞ When recharging and/or working near the battery, always wear safety
glasses and protective clothing with long sleeves.
☞ If acid is spilled, thoroughly rinse affected skin immediately with clean
water and seek medical attention immediately.
WARNING
Battery explosion hazard. Lead acid batteries can generate a potentially
explosive hydrogen and oxygen mixture. Batteries can explode or rupture
during jump starting, particularly if the electrolyte is low or has been frozen.
☞ Avoid open flames and sparks near the battery. Do not smoke.
☞ Before jump-starting, take the battery to the dealer for appraisal by a
qualified technician.
☞ Replace a dead battery with a new one equivalent to the original.
☞ Always disconnect the negative terminal (–) from the battery before
starting repair work on the electrical system.
Battery A is located in the engine compartment, on the left next to the hydraulic oil
- +
reservoir. The battery is low in maintenance and no fluid needs to be refilled under
normal operating conditions. However have the battery checked at regular intervals.
Always follow the specific battery safety instructions!
A
IMPORTANT
As an option, the machine can be fitted with a battery master switch
– see chapter 3 “Battery master switch (option)” on page 3-20.
Fig. 215 : Battery
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-43

Maintenance
Preparing a battery replacement:

Replacing the battery
:
CAUTION
In order to avoid short circuits when disconnecting the battery leads, always
bear in mind the order for removing the leads under all circumstances!
☞ Remove the battery lead from the negative terminal (−)

- + ☞ Remove the battery lead from the positive terminal (+)
☞ Remove the battery brackets from the base
☞ Replace the battery by a new one
A ☞ Install the battery brackets in the base
☞ Connect the battery lead to the positive terminal (+)
☞ Connect the battery lead to the negative terminal (−)
☞ Switch on the battery master switch (option)
Fig. 216 : Battery IMPORTANT

Use batteries only of the specified capacity
– see chapter 6 “Electrical system” on page 6-6
5-44 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Servicing and maintenance at regular intervals

Before driving the machine
☞ Check every time before driving the machine:
• Is the light system OK?
• Is the signaling and warning system OK?
Every week
☞ Check once a week:
• Electric fuses
– see chapter 6 “Fuse box” on page 6-6

• Cable and grounding connections
• Charge condition of battery - see Checking/replacing the battery on page 5-43
• Condition of battery terminals
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-45

Maintenance
Inspection and maintenance on the electrical system at regular intervals

NOTICE: Do not clean electrical components, such as the starter, relays and fuses with
a high-pressure cleaner!
☞ Cover electrical components with a water-tight cover before cleaning them
IMPORTANT
Blown fuses indicate overloading or short circuits. The electrical system must
therefore be checked by an authorized technician before installing the new
fuse.
IMPORTANT
Have malfunctioning relays checked and replaced by an authorized service
center.
Malfunctioning components of the electrical system must always be replaced
by an authorized technician. Bulbs and fuses may be changed by unqualified
persons
☞ Daily checks before operating the machine - see Maintenance plan on page 5-62
• Light system
• Signaling and warning systems
• Starter
☞ Weekly checks
• Electric fuses – replace malfunctioning fuses by new ones with the specified
amperage only – see chapter 6 “Electrical system” on page 6-6
• Electric and grounding connections – ensure good contact of leads and fuses
• Charge condition of battery – - see Checking/replacing the battery on page 5-43
• Condition of electric lines – there must be no chafing
Checking the alternator

Always observe the following instructions:
• Only test run the engine with the battery connected
• When connecting the battery, ensure that the poles (+/−) are not inverted
• Always disconnect the negative terminal (−) from the battery before starting repair
work on the electrical system or before connecting a quick battery charger
• Have malfunctioning charge indicator lights immediately replaced
Alternator
Always observe the following instructions:
• Only test run the engine with the battery connected
• When connecting the battery, ensure that the poles (+/−) are not inverted
• Always disconnect the battery before performing welding work or connecting
a quick battery charger
• Have malfunctioning charge indicator lights immediately replaced
5-46 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Checking/replacing fuses
The fuses are located on the right in the side console under the cover.
☞ Disconnect the negative terminal (−) from the battery
☞ Remove the cover
☞ Remove malfunctioning fuses from the relay bracket and replace them by new ones
☞ Check the electrical system for correct function
CAUTION
F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 Fire hazard. Blown fuses indicate overloading or short circuits
☞ Have the electrical system checked by an authorized service center
before inserting new fuses
F16 F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9 F8
• In order to avoid damage to the electrical system, use only fuses
and relays of the specified load capacity (amperage)
– see chapter 6 “Fuse box” on page 6-6
Fig. 217 : Fuse box
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-47

Maintenance
Checking/replacing relays
IMPORTANT
Have malfunctioning relays checked and replaced by an authorized service
center.
The switching relays are located underneath the switch panel (board) on the side console
on the right. (accessed via the maintenance flap on the outside right of the cabin)
☞ Remove knurled screw A
☞ Raise the side console to the rear
☞ Remove the malfunctioning relay from the relay bracket and replace it by a new one
• Relay descriptions and output indications
– see chapter 6 “Switching relays” on page 6-7
☞ Check the electrical system for correct function
Checking/replacing fuses of the main fuse box

The main fuse box with the power relays and the preheating time control unit is located in
the engine compartment on the left underneath the battery
Fig. 218 : Main fuse box ☞ Remove the fuse box cover
☞ Main fuse and relay descriptions and output indications
➥ – see chapter 6 “Main fuse box with relays” on page 6-7
5-48 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
5.19 General cleaning and maintenance

Safety instructions regarding cleaning work
The wrong choice of cleaning equipment and agents can impair the operating safety of the
machine on the one hand, and on the other undermine the health of the persons in charge
of cleaning the machine. Therefore always observe the following instructions.
Environment
In order to avoid damage to the environment, clean the machine only in wash
bays and places provided to this effect!
Cleaning with washing solvents

• Ensure adequate room ventilation
• Wear suitable protective clothing
• Do not use flammable liquids, such as gasoline or diesel fuel
Cleaning with compressed air
• Work carefully
• Wear safety glasses and protective clothing
• Do not aim the compressed air at the skin or at other people
• Do not use compressed air for cleaning your clothing
Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner or steam jet
• Electrical components and damping material must be covered and not directly
exposed to the jet
• Cover the vent filter on the hydraulic oil reservoir and the filler caps for fuel,
hydraulic oil, etc.
• Cover the engine
• Cover the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders (the scraper is not water-tight,
and water in the guide bushing causes corrosion and damage to the piston rod)
• Fully cover all seals on the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders
• Cover electrical components such as the alternator, relays, etc.
• Cover the controls and seals
• Cover the air-intake filter, etc.
Cleaning with volatile and flammable anticorrosion agents and sprays
• Ensure adequate room ventilation
• Do not use unprotected lights or open flames
• Do not smoke!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-49

Maintenance
Cleaning inside the cabin
NOTICE: Possible machine damage. Water under high pressure can penetrate into the
electrical system and cause short circuits, and damage seals and disable the controls.
☞ Do not use high-pressure cleaners, steam jets or high-pressure water to clean inside
the cabin.
We recommend using the following aids to clean the cabin:

• Broom
• Vacuum cleaner
• Damp cloth
• Bristle brush
• Water with mild soap solution
Cleaning the pedals
WARNING
Accident hazard. Loss of machine control due to dirt or malfunction of the
pedals
☞ Keep the floor under the pedals clean
☞ Keep the hinges clean and in good operating condition
☞ Clean the pedals
☞ Apply spray oil to the pedal hinges if necessary
☞ - see Maintenance plan on page 5-62
WARNING
Injury hazard. Accident hazard.
Secure the machine correctly before cleaning or servicing the pedals
☞ Park the machine on firm and level ground
☞ Lower the loader unit and the attachment to the ground without applying
any pressure to it
• Place the attachment, for example a bucket, on the ground so that the
edge applies slight pressure to the ground
5-50 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Cleaning the door locks and arresters

☞ Keep the door locks, arresters and hinges clean
☞ Apply spray oil to the hinges and joints if necessary
☞ – see chapter 5 “Maintenance plan” on page 5-62
Cleaning the seat belt
Caution
Personal injury hazard. Water and dirt accumulations on the seat belt and in
the winding mechanism can cause damage to these components and impair
winding.
☞ Keep the seat belt and winding mechanism clean.
☞ Only wind the seat belt when it is dry.
☞ Have an authorized service center replace a malfunctioning seat belt by
a new one
The following aids are recommended for cleaning:

• Mild soap solution
• Do not use any chemical agents – the material can be destroyed!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-51

Maintenance
Cleaning the exterior of the machine

• High-pressure cleaner or bristle brush with water and mild soap solution
CAUTION
In order to avoid corrosion on the machine (paint finish, joints, slide plates,
threaded fittings, etc.), thoroughly clean the machine with water after driving
on saline ground or roads and after driving the machine to a different site!
CAUTION
In order to avoid leaks and damage to the hydraulic cylinders:
☞ Fully cover all seals on the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders
☞ Do not clean any seals on the hydraulic cylinders with a high-pressure
cleaner!
☞ Once cleaning is over, extend the telescopic boom completely and apply
oil to the slide plates with a spray lance
- see Spraying oil onto the slide plates after a salt application (spray lance)
on page 5-29
NOTICE: Dry the door and engine cover locks with compressed air after cleaning them
Environment
When cleaning the machine, position it only on surfaces with oil separators.
IMPORTANT
A machine with anticorrosion protection (“aggressive media”) must be cleaned
separately! – see chapter 5 “Maintenance “Aggressive Media” (option)” on
page 5-55!
5-52 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Cleaning the engine compartment

• High-pressure cleaner
Steam jet
WARNING
Crushing, cutting or burn hazards.
☞ Stop the engine before cleaning.
☞ Possible sensor damage. Water or steam jet cleaners can penetrate
sensitive electronic components, leading to sensor failure and possible
engine damage.
☞ Allow the machine to cool completely before cleaning the engine with a
water or steam jet.
☞ Do not point the jet directly at electric sensors such as the oil pressure
switch.
Environment
When cleaning the machine, position it only on surfaces with oil separators.
Checking the threaded fittings

All threaded fittings must be checked regularly, even if they are not listed in the
maintenance plans.
Retighten loose connections immediately.
Refer to chapter “Technical data” for the tightening torques.
Checking pivots and hinges

All mechanical pivot points on the machine (door hinges, joints, for example) and fittings
(door arresters, for example) must be lubricated regularly, even if they are not listed in
the lubrication plan.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b510.fm 5-53

Maintenance
5.20 Maintenance and servicing of the attachments
IMPORTANT
Correct maintenance and service is absolutely necessary for smooth and
continuous
operation, and for an increased service life of the attachments. Please observe
the lubrication and maintenance instructions in the Operator’s Manuals of the
attachements
5-54 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b510.fm

Maintenance
Maintenance
5.21 Maintenance “Aggressive Media” (option)

Important information on anticorrosion protection
The machine is specially protected against corrosion for work in aggressive media
(a saline environment, for example).
However, this anticorrosion protection is affected by external factors, for example dirt,
cleaning, etc. This is why it only has ongoing effect if checked at regular intervals and
renewed or reapplied as required.
If no anticorrosion protection is applied to the machine, for example for work in a saline
environment, we recommend retrofitting your machine with the “Aggressive Media”
option by a sales partner.
The following anticorrosion wax has been applied at the factory:
Elaskon 2000 ML, Elaskon UBS light

Designation:
Elaskon Aero 46 special, Elaskon Multi 80
Manufacturer: ELASKON Sachsen GmbH & Co. KG, Dresden (Germany)
Components coated with anticorrosive wax
Component Remarks
• Before applying the wax:
• Apply contact spray to contact surfaces and
All electric plug-and-socket,
connect the plug-and-socket connections again.
grounding and crimp connections
• Apply a particularly thick anticorrosion layer to
the connecting parts of the fuel level transmitter.
• Except:
• Piston rods (chromium coating)
• Cabin, cabin bearings
• Engine cover, engine mounting
All parts of the machine, for example
• Air filter
Axles, gearbox, trim panels,
• Counterweight
servicing lids, loader unit, quickhitch
• Fastening surfaces for installing parts on frame
• Radiator and insulating mat
• Mudguards, rubber and plastic parts
• Light elements
Flange surfaces • For example axles, diesel engine and cabin
bearing:
• Seal gaps with anticorrosion wax after assembly
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * Aggressive Medien.fm 5-55

Maintenance
Measures for maintaining anticorrosive protection
WARNING
Damage to health due to anticorrosion protection!
Can cause serious injury or death.
☞ When handling chemical substances of any kind, such as solvents,
wax etc., observe the specific product-related safety regulations
(safety data sheet)!
☞ Ensure adequate room ventilation!
☞ Do not use unprotected lights or open flames!
☞ Do not smoke!
☞ Corrosion on electric connections or components can cause dangerous
operating malfunctions.
☞ Perform work on the electrical system only with the battery disconnected
and the diesel engine stopped!
IMPORTANT
Maintenance intervals - see Maintenance plan on page 5-62.
Cleaning
Contrary to the instructions given in Chapter “General maintenance” in the Operator’s
Manual of the machine, neither clean the machine with a bristle brush nor with a steam
jet or a high-pressure cleaner!
• If cleaning the machine with these means cannot be avoided, check the wax coating
very carefully and have it renewed or reapplied as required.
• If you replace components, check whether they are classified as in the table
“Components coated with anticorrosive wax” and whether they are subject to special
treatment before assembly.
• Have the sealing checked and repaired at least once a year by ELASKON – see the
Elaskon servicing pass supplied with the machine.
• If the machine is used in corrosive environment over a longer period of time, remove
the floor mat in the cabin to avoid the accumulation of corrosive humidity.
• Thoroughly clean machines that are put out of operation over a longer period of time.
• Clean the machine at least once a week. In particular, remove corrosive deposits
(such as salt crusts) as fast as possible.
• Clean the machine with cold running water preferably.
5-56 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * Aggressive Medien.fm

Maintenance
Applying the protective anticorrosion coating

Bear in mind the following instructions as you apply the anticorrosive wax:
• Carefully cover all fastening surfaces and elements to which the anticorrosive
protection may not be applied
– see chapter 5 “Components coated with anticorrosive wax” on page 5-55.
• Apply Elaskon products with a brush or commercially available spray equipment.
• The protective Elaskon coating can be removed with an Elaskon cleanser if necessary.
• Spots are difficult to remove on clothing.
• Affix a “Wet paint” or a similar sign to newly coated machines.
Treatment of oxidized surfaces

If in spite of all precautionary measures some components should be affected by corrosion
(oxidized), treat the oxidized area follows:
Electric connections
• Remove the remaining protective wax at the oxidized area with an Elaskon cleanser.
• Apply an oxide solvent (Elaskon Multi 80) to the affected area.
• Apply Elaskon Multi 80 to the contact surfaces of the plug-and-socket connection.
• Establish the connection.
• Apply/spray anticorrosion wax onto the electric connection from all sides.
Sheet-metal parts
• Remove the remaining protective wax at the oxidized area with an Elaskon cleanser.
• Remove all remaining corrosion and paint coating from the affected area down to the
bare material, otherwise the protective coating will not adhere properly.
• Clean the affected area with a cleaning solvent, and apply a 2-component prime
coating and then a 2-component paint coating to it.
• Then preserve the area with anticorrosion wax.
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * Aggressive Medien.fm 5-57

Maintenance
Notes:
5-58 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * Aggressive Medien.fm

Maintenance
Maintenance
5.22 Fluids and lubricants

Component/application Fluid/lubricant SAE grade Specification Season/temperature Capacities1
SAE 10W; EO103 Below −5 °C (23 °F)
−10 to +10 °C
SAE 20W20; EO203
2 (14 to 50 °F)
Engine oil About
Diesel engine 5 to 30 °C
with oil filter SAE 30; EO303 10.5 l (2.77 gal)
(41 to 86 °F)
HD-C 10W-40; EO1040B3
Year-round
HD-C 15W-40; EO1540B3
Gearbox 0.8 l (0.21 gal)
85 W 90 API GL5 or
Front and rear axle differentials 4.0 l (1.05 gal)
Gearbox oil4 SAE 90 LS Year-round
Planetary drives – left and right, (hypoid gear oil) 0.9 l (0.23 gal) each
front and rear axles
SAE 5 W/30 Up to −25 °C (-13 °F)
SAE 5 W/40; EO 0540B3
Engine oil2
SAE 10 W/40; EO 0540B3 Up to −15 °C (5 °F)
SAE 15 W/40; EO 1540B3 Up to −10 °C (14 °F)
HVLPD 46 (HYD05303) About 50 l
Hydraulic oil reservoir Hydraulic oil5
200 Hydraulic (13.21 gal)
AVILUB Syntofluid 46
Year-round
PANOLIN HLP Synth 46
Biodegradable oil
404 Biodegradeable
Hydraulic 32/46
Grease nipples, Multipurpose Lithium-saponified
Year-round As required
telescopic boom/axles grease brand-name grease MPG-A3
Battery terminals Acid-proof grease SP-B3 Year-round As required
Anticorrosion Elaskon
Aggressive media (option) Year-round As required
protection www.elaskon.de
Optimoly paste “TA”
Installation of pins, shafts Special grease 6 Year-round As required
White-Paste
Grade no. 2-D Over 4 °C (39.2 °F)
Fuel tank Diesel fuel7 About 60 l (15.85 gal)
Grade no. 1-D Below 4 °C (39.2 °F)
Braking system Brake fluid8 Agip LHM Super/Shell LHM Year-round –
Water
MS Frostschutz Year-round (45 %) 5.2 l (1.37 gal)
Engine cooling Antifreeze9, 10, 11
HAVOLINE XLC −31 °C (−23.8 °F) Antifreeze
(55 %) 4.3 l (1.13 gal)
Water
Year-round (67 %) 1.3 l (0.34 gal)
Washer system Cleaning agent10 Water + antifreeze
−20 °C (−4 °F) Antifreeze
(33 %) 0.7 l (0.18 gal)
1. The capacities indicated are approximate values; the oil level check alone is relevant for the correct oil level
2. MIL-L-2104C; API CD/CE/CH4; CCMC-D4
3. Abbreviation for lubricants (Hauptverband der Deutschen Bauindustrie e. V. – German construction engineering association)
4. MIL-L-2105B; API-GL5
5. DIN 51 524
6. 250 gr tube, order no.: 1000030311
7. DIN EN 590
8. Standard: B 71 2710
9. SeeCoolant compound table on page 6-9
10. See manufacturer’s indications on the packaging and bear in mind the antifreeze compound table
11. Replace the coolant every 2 years!
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b520.fm 5-59

Maintenance
5.23 Explanation of symbols on the maintenance label

Symbol Explanation
Before starting maintenance, follow the safety instructions in the Operator’s Manual.
Before starting maintenance, read the “Maintenance” chapter in the Operator’s Manual.
Perform a functional check of the light system.
Check tires for damage, pressure and tread depth.
Perform a functional check and synchronize the steering system.
Perform a functional check of the brake system.
Check the hydraulic oil level, add oil if necessary.
Check the engine oil level, add oil if necessary.
Compress the dust valve
Check radiator for engine coolant and hydraulic oil for dirt. Clean if necessary.
Check condition and initial tension of V-belt. Retighten or replace if necessary.
Leakage check: check pipes, flexible lines and threaded fittings for tightness, leaks and chafing.
Rectify if necessary.
Leakage check:
Check the fuel/water separator. Drain water if necessary.
Lubrication service:
lubricate the assemblies as required.
5-60 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b520.fm

Maintenance
5.24 Maintenance label

Location: inside the cabin on the rear window
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b520.fm 5-61

Maintenance plan
Maintenance plan
5.25 Maintenance plan

Important information on the maintenance plan
For servicing and maintenance on the attachment, please refer to the Operator’s and
maintenance manual of the attachment manufacturer as well.
Have maintenance, the Delivery Inspection, the 1st Inspection at 100 operating hours
and the 2nd Inspection every 500 and 1500 operating hours (once a year) performed
by an authorized service center, otherwise warranty claims will not be acknowledged.
Maintenance plan overview
Service Service center

User/operator
center
at 100 o/h2
every 1500 o/h

every 500 o/h2
1st Inspection
Every 10 o/h
Every 50 o/h
Work description1
once a year
inspection
Delivery
(daily)
“A”
“B”
“C”
Oil and filter changes ( ) (check the oil levels after a test run):
• Change the engine oil ● ● ●
• Replace the engine oil filter ● ● ●
• Replace fuel filter, fuel prefilter ● ● ●
• Replace the air filter insert 3, 4; replace the safety ● ●
cartridge every 3rd time the air filter insert is replaced
• Replace the gearbox oil in front and rear axle differential ● ●
• Change the gearbox oil in the rear axle gearbox ● ●
• Replace the gearbox oil in front and rear axle planetary drives
● ●
(left and right)
• Replace the hydraulic oil5 ●
• Replace the microfilter (line filter in drive) ● ●
• Replace the hydraulic oil filter insert ● ●
• Replace the hydraulic oil reservoir breather filter4 ●
• Replace the fine-dust filter6 of the heating and ventilation ● ●
system
Inspection work ( ):
• Check engine oil level ● ●
• Check hydraulic oil level ● ● ● ● ●
• Check coolant level7 ● ● ● ● ●
• Check gearbox oil level in front and rear axle differential ● ● ● ●
• Check gearbox oil level in rear axle gearbox ● ● ● ●
• Check gearbox oil level in front and rear axle, left and right
● ● ● ●
planetary drives
• Check brake fluid7 (LHM) level ● ● ● ● ●
8 ● ● ● ●
• Check water/oil radiator for dirt and clean if necessary
9
• Check engine coolant (also check antifreeze in autumn/winter ● ● ● ● ●
and at temperatures below 4 °C!)
• When using biodegradable oil: drain the condensation water
● ●
in the hydraulic oil reservoir 5
5-62 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b540.fm

Maintenance plan

User/operator
center
at 100 o/h2
every 1500 o/h

every 500 o/h2
1st Inspection
Every 10 o/h
Every 50 o/h
Work description1
once a year
inspection
Delivery
(daily)
“A”
“B”
“C”
Other inspection work ( ):
• Clean dust valve on air filter housing 3 ● ● ● ● ●
• Check the pedals.
● ● ● ●
Clean them and apply grease or oil if necessary
• Check the locks/door arrester.
● ● ● ●
Clean them and apply grease or oil if necessary
• V-belt: check condition and pre-tension.
● ● ● ● ●
Retighten or replace if necessary 7
Replace every 3000 operating
• Replace toothed belt10 (engine valve timing)
hours or after a max. 5 years
• Check the additional fuel filter. Drain water if necessary ● ● ● ●
• Clean filter insert on fuel pump, replace if necessary ● ● ● ●
• Check valve clearance (engine management). Set if necessary ● ●
• Check battery charge condition. Charge if necessary11 ● ● ●
• Clean the fine-dust filter of the heating system
● ● ● ●
(replace every 500 o/h)
• Check and set service and parking brake pads17. ● ● ●
Replace if necessary
• Tire check (damage, air pressure, tread depth) ● ● ● ● ●
• Aggressive media (option): check anticorrosion protection,
● ● ● ● ●
renew if necessary12
• Check the wear pads on the telescopic boom and replace if
● ● ● ●
necessary
Check screws and nuts or threaded fittings for tightness on the following assemblies/components. Retighten if necessary
• Engine and engine bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Steering system17 ● ● ● ● ●
• Hydraulic system ● ● ● ● ●
• Telescopic boom (pin locking) ● ● ● ● ●
• Axle mounting, axle suspension ● ● ● ● ●
• Counterweight (attachment) ● ● ● ● ●
• Fastening screws of cardan shafts ● ● ● ● ●
• Fastening screws of cabin ● ● ● ● ●
• Wheel nuts ● ● ● ● ●
• Electrical system: check electric and grounding connections,
● ● ● ● ●
chafing on wiring harness, battery terminals
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b540.fm 5-63

Maintenance plan

User/operator
center
at 100 o/h2
every 1500 o/h

every 500 o/h2
1st Inspection
Every 10 o/h
Every 50 o/h
Work description1
once a year
inspection
Delivery
(daily)
“A”
“B”
“C”
Lubrication service ( ):13
• Hinges, joints and fittings (door arresters, for example) ● ● ● ● ●
• Rear axle oscillating bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Front and rear axle planetary drive bearings (left and right) ● ● ● ● ●
Loader unit – see Lubrication work on page 5-27
• Slide plates of telescopic boom ● ● ● ● ●
• Compensating cylinder bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Push-out cylinder bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Lift frame bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Tilt rod bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Tilt lever bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Lift cylinder bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Tilt cylinder bearing ● ● ● ● ●
• Quickhitch: bearing on lift frame ● ● ● ● ●
Functional check ( ):
• Service and parking brake14, 17 ● ● ● ● ●
17 ● ● ● ● ●
• Steering system synchronous position of wheels
• Electrical system – lights, indicator lights, signaling system,
● ● ● ● ●
washer system
• Air conditioning (option) ● ● ● ● ●
• Drive interlock (option)
• Telescopic boom safe load indicator ● ● ● ● ●
• Seat adjustment, seat belt ● ● ● ● ●
• Lock – control lever (joystick) and 3rd control circuit for road
● ● ● ● ●
travel
• Load stabilizer (option) ● ● ● ● ●
5-64 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b540.fm

Maintenance plan

User/operator
center
at 100 o/h2
every 1500 o/h

every 500 o/h2
1st Inspection
Every 10 o/h
Every 50 o/h
Work description1
once a year
inspection
Delivery
(daily)
“A”
“B”
“C”
Leakage check ( ):
Check for tightness, leaks and chafing: pipes, flexible lines and threaded fittings. Rectify if necessary:
• Air intake line15 (air filter – engine) ● ● ● ● ●
• Engine lubrication (engine – filter) ● ● ● ● ●
• Fuel lines16 ● ● ● ● ●
• Cooling system (engine – hydraulic oil) ● ● ● ● ●
• Steering system17 (flexible lines and cylinders) ● ● ● ● ●
• Hydraulic system/loader unit (flexible lines and cylinders)18 ● ● ● ● ●
• Braking system17 (flexible lines and cylinders) ● ● ● ● ●
• Safe load indicator of telescopic boom ● ● ● ● ●
• Air conditioning system (option) – flexible lines, condenser,
● ● ● ● ●
dehumidifier
1. Have repair work performed by an authorized service center only
2. Have maintenance only performed by an authorized service center (acknowledgement of warranty claims)
3. Replace filter insert as indicated by the indicator light on the air filter housing, however at least every 12 months or 1500 operating hours
4. When working in an acidic environment, replace the filter every 300 operating hours
5. When using biodegradable oil: drain the condensation water in the hydraulic oil reservoir every 500 operating hours, in any case before the cold season
6. Depending on operation and dust conditions, it may be necessary to replace the fine-dust filter more frequently
7. Replace every 2 years
8. Clean radiator more frequently depending on operation and dust conditions
9. Replace the engine coolant every other year
10. Toothed belt may be replaced by authorized personnel only
11. Make a note of the date the battery is charged
12. See maintenance instructions for aggressive media, order no. 1000108296
13. Lubricate attachment according to manufacturer’s instructions
14. Check components (disc brake) regularly for dirt and have them regularly checked by an authorized service center for ease of movement. This particularly applies to work operation in a saline
environment.
15. In order to avoid engine damage, replace air intake lines with cracks and chafe marks immediately
16. Replace flexible fuel lines every 2 years (plastic lines)
17. Safety part! All maintenance and repair work must be performed by an authorized service center (acknowledgement of warranty claims)
18. Replace flexible lines every 6 years (UVV, DIN 20066 part 5)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b540.fm 5-65

Maintenance plan
Notes:
5-66 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b540.fm

Technical data
Technical data
6 Technical data
6.1 Model designations and trade names (overview)
Wheel loader model Trade name
346-11 750 T
6.2 Frame
Sturdy steel sheet chassis, rubber-mounted engine
6.3 Engine
Engine
Product Deutz diesel engine
Type D 2011 L04 W
Design In line
Number of cylinders 4
Displacement 3620 cm³ (221.2 in³)
Bore and stroke 96 x 125 mm (3.78 x 4.92 in)
Compression ratio 1:19
45 kW
Output (as per ISO 9249)
at 2300 rpm
Max. torque 210 Nm (155 ft. lbs.) at 1700 rpm
Minimum idling speed 1000 – 1080 rpm
Specific minimum fuel consumption 220 g/kWh (7.74 oz/kWh)
Fuel injection system Direct fuel injection
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Starting aid Glow plug
30° in all directions
Max. inclined position
Observe the tilting limit of the machine!
(engine no longer supplied with oil):
(20° laterally)
Oil pressure 3.0 – 4.5 bar (43 – 64 psi) at 2300 rpm
Exhaust emissions according
2004/26 EC
to EC standard
Standard emissions level American Tier 3
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-1

Technical data
6.4 Drive
Variable displacement pump
Variable displacement 20 kph 30 kph (option)

pump (12.4 mph) (18.6 mph)
Automotive, infinitely variable
Design
hydrostatic axial-piston gearbox
0 – 45 cm³/rev 0 – 56 cm³/rev
Displacement
(0 – 2.75 in³/rev) (0 – 3.42 in³/rev)
Max. operating pressure 370 bar (5262 psi) 470 bar (6684 psi)
Starting speed 1200 – 1300 min-1 at 50 bar (715 psi) HP
Droop 2150±50 rpm at 250 bar (3573 psi) HP
Boost pump
Boost pump
Design Internal gear pump
Displacement 11.6 cm³/rev (0.71 in³/rev)
Charging/boost pressure 30 bar (429 psi) at 1500 rpm
Speed-sensitive, hydraulic displacement
Control
adjustment with pressure cutoff
Travel direction Electrohydraulic control
Inching Inching valve
Variable displacement motor
Variable displacement 20 kph 30 kph (option)

motor (12.4 mph) (18.6 mph)
Design Axial piston motor (swash plate design)
20.6 to 80.7 cm³/rev 25 to 107 cm³/rev
Capacity
(1.26 to 4.92 in³/rev) (1.53 to 6.53 in³/rev)
1st speed range: 1st speed range:
0 – 6 kph (0 – 3.7 mph), 0 – 7 kph (0 – 4.4 mph),
forward and reverse forward and reverse
Travel speed
2nd speed range: 2nd speed range:
0 – 20 kph (0 – 12.4 mph), 0 – 30 kph (0 – 18.6 mph),
forward and reverse forward and reverse
Pushing power 34.5 kN (25,427 ft. lbs.) 39.0 kN (28,743 ft. lbs.)
6-2 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Technical data
6.5 Axles
Front axle
Front axle
Planetary steering and drive axle,
Design
rigid screw connection with frame
Differential lock 45 % self-locking differential
King-pin inclination 0°
Camber 0°
Steering angle 40°
Toe-in 0 mm (0 in)
Track width 1400 mm (55.12 in)
Rear axle
Rear axle
Design Oscillating planetary steering and drive axle
Differential lock 45 % self-locking differential
King-pin inclination 0°
Camber 0°
Total oscillation angle1 +/− 11°
Steering angle 40°
Toe-in 0 mm (0 in)
Track width 1400 mm (55.12 in)
1. With tires 12.5-18
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-3

Technical data
6.6 Brakes
Service brake
Service brake
Design Foot-operated hydraulic disc brake
Location Front axle input
Effect On both axles via cardan shaft
Brake fluid – see chapter 5 “Fluids and lubricants” on page 5-59
Parking brake
Parking brake
Design Manual mechanical disc brake
Location Front axle input
6.7 Steering system
Steering system
Hydrostatic 4 wheel steering
Design
with emergency steering features
Steering mode 4 wheel steering
Hydraulic pump, steering unit with
priority valve, steering cylinders with
Assemblies
automatic synchronization in left and
right final positions
Max. pressure of hydraulic lines 175 – 180 bar (2500 – 2572 psi)
Hydraulic pump Displacement
(gear pump) 32 cm³/rev (1.96 in³/rev)
Maximum steering angle ±40°
6-4 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Technical data
6.8 Operating hydraulics

Hydraulic pump, control valve, lift and tilt cylinders
Designation
Hydraulic pump Gear pump
32 cm³/rev (1.96 in³/rev)
Displacement
71 l/min (18.76 gal/min) at 2300 rpm
Control valve 3 sections
• Operation – hydraulic lift and tilt cylinder with
mechanical lock for machine travel on public
roads
Control lever (joystick) • Push button – electric control for retraction
and extension of telescopic boom
• Switch – electric control for travel direction
and neutral position
• Operation – quickhitch and hydraulic
3rd control circuit control lever attachments with mechanical lock for
machine travel on public roads
Max. operating pressure 210 bar (3000 psi)
Secondary pressure limiting Rod side 240 bar (3430 psi)
Hydraulic tilt cylinder Base side 120 bar (1715 psi)
Secondary pressure limiting
Base side 300 bar (4287 psi)
Hydraulic lift cylinder
Filter Return suction filter
3rd control circuit 71 l/min (18.76 gal/min)
(connection of attachments) at 210 bar (3000 psi)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-5

Technical data
6.9 Electrical system

Electric units
Designation
Alternator 12 V 95 A
Starter 12 V 2.3 kW
Battery 12 V 88 Ah
Fuse box
No. Rated current Protected circuit

F1 7.5 High beam (left)
F2 7.5 High beam (right)
F3 5 Left side marker and rear lights, front socket
Switch assignment: front/rear working lights,
front attachments (option), rotating beacon (option)
F4 5 Switch lights: lights, heating S5, load stabilizer S8,
3rd control circuit, right side marker and rear lights,
front socket (option)
High current relay – preheating and starting, high current
F5 7.5 relay, interior light, relays – minus compensation, preheating
indicator light, hazard warning light
12 V power supply (1-pole socket), rotating beacon (option),
F6 25
front/rear working lights
F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F7 25 All lights
F8 7.5 Low beam (left)
F9 7.5 Low beam (right)
F16F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9 F8
Switching relays – front attachment (option), instrument
F10 5
Fig. 219 : Fuse box
panel, cutoff solenoid
F11 15 Washer pump, rear wiper, relays – wiper, front wiper, horn
F12 5 Solenoid valve 1st/2nd speed range, load stabilizer
Relays – forward/reverse, solenoid valve – forward/reverse,
F13 7.5
backup warning system
F14 20 Front attachment (option), heating fan
Relay – turn indicators, brake lights, solenoid valve
F15 7.5
(exhaust gas recirculation)
F16 5 Safe load indicator, radio (option)
6-6 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Technical data
Main fuse box with relays

The main fuse box with the power relays and the preheating time control unit is located in
F18 the engine compartment on the left underneath the battery
.
F17
K5
Fuse no. Rated current (A) Protected circuit
F17 80 A Main fuse (machine)

K7
F19 F18 40 A Preheating (air-intake preheating)
K29 F19 10 A Minus compensation
Fig. 220 : Main fuse box

Relay no. Protected circuit
K5 Preheating: power relay
K7 Start: starter relay
K29 Minus compensation
Switching relays
The switching relays are located underneath the switch panel on the side console on the
right. (accessed via the maintenance flap on the outside right of the cabin)
Switching relay
Protected circuit
K10 K17 no.
K18
K1 High-current relay
K3 Reverse travel switching relay

K3
K4 Forward travel switching relay
K4 K10 Switching relay – turn indicators
K16 Switching relay – front socket (option)

K16 K17 Switching relay (retract telescopic boom)
K18 Switching relay (extend telescopic boom)

K16
K27
K23 Wiper switching relay
K16 K27 Step-by-step relay 4 working lights
K23
K1
Fig. 221 : Relays
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-7

Technical data
6.10 Tires
Tire pressure1 Wheel rims

Tire size
Front Rear Wheel rim Wheel offset
365/70 R18 EM 146A2/135B SPT9
365/70 R18 135B/146A2 E
12.5-18 MPT 04 10PR ag
335/80 R18 151A2/139B XZSL
340/80 R18 143A8/143B /XMCL 11 x 18
365/70R18 EM-01 135B ag
12.5-18 MPT317 128G
340/80 R18 550 143A8/138D 3.0 2.5 0 mm
12.5-18 MPT 131D A225
375/70 R20 MPT 136G AC70G
335/80 R20 147K MPT 81
11 x 20
12.5-20 MPT317 136 B
12.5-20 MPT 137B A225
405/70 R18 141B/153A2 EM-01
13 x 18
405/70 R18 152A2/141B A608
1. Increase front tire pressure by 0.5 bar during pallet forks operation!
6.11 Weights
Weight
Curb weight1 5100 kg (11244 lbs.)
Gross weight rating 6000 kg (13228 lbs.)
Front gross axle weight rating
4000 kg (8819 lbs.)
Rear axle weight rating
Max. authorized load for towing gear None
1. With standard bucket, operator and full fuel tank
6-8 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Technical data
6.12 Noise levels
Sound power level

Measured value 99.8 dB (A)
Guaranteed value 101 dB (A)
Operator-perceived noise level 79 dB (A)
IMPORTANT
Measurement of sound power level according to EC Directive 2000/14 EC.
Operator-perceived noise level measured according to EC Directives
84/532/EEC, 89/514/EEC and 95/27/EEC. Measurements performed on
asphalted surface.
6.13 Vibration
Vibration
Effective acceleration value for the m
< 2.5 ------ (< 8.2 feet/s²)
upper extremities of the body s2
Effective acceleration value for the m

< 0.5 ------ (< 1.64 feet/s²)
body s2
6.14 Coolant compound table

Outside temperature Water1 Antifreeze2
Up to °C (°F) % by volume % by volume
4 °C (39.2 °F) 99 –
−10 °C (14 °F) 79 20
−20 °C (−4 °F) 65 34
−25 °C (−13 °F) 59 40
−30 °C (−22 °F) 55 45
−42 °C (−43 °F) 50 50
1. Water quality at 20 °C = 6.5 – 8.5 ph/overall hardness 3 – 20 °dGH
2. See Fluids and lubricants on page 5-59
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-9

Technical data
6.15 Tightening torques

General tightening torques
Screw Tightening torques in Nm1 (ft. lbs.)

dimensions 8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 3 Nm (2.2 ft. lbs.) 4 Nm (2.9 ft. lbs.) 5 Nm (3.7 ft. lbs.)
M5 5.5 Nm (4.1 ft. lbs.) 8 Nm (5.9 ft. lbs.) 10 Nm (7.4 ft. lbs.)
M8 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.) 40 Nm (29.5 ft. lbs.)
M14 125 Nm (92.1 ft. lbs.) 185 Nm (136 ft. lbs.) 220 Nm (162 ft. lbs.)
M16 195 Nm (144 ft. lbs.) 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.) 340 Nm (250 ft. lbs.)
1450 Nm 1700 Nm
M27 1000 Nm (737 ft. lbs.)
(1069 ft. lbs.) (1253 ft. lbs.)
1950 Nm 2300 Nm
M30 1350 Nm (995 ft. lbs.)
(1437 ft. lbs.) (1695 ft. lbs.)
1. These values are valid for screws with untreated, non-lubricated surfaces.
Specific tightening torques
Designation Torque
Wheel nut 390 ±10 Nm (287.6±7 ft. lbs.)
6-10 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Technical data
Conversion table (DIN standard – USA standard)

All indications made without engagement.
Volume
1 litre = 2.1 pts (pints)
1 litre = 1.06 qts (quarts)
1 litre = 0.26 gals (gallons)
1 cm³ (cubic centimeter) = 0.0611 in³ (cubic inches)
Length indications
1 mm (millimeter) = 0.03937 in (inches)
1 m (metre) = 3.281 feet
1 m (metre) = 1.0936 yards
1 km (kilometer) = 0.622 miles
Weight
1 kp/cm² (kilopond/cm²) = 2.2 lbs.
1 kg (kilogram) = 2.205 lbs. (pounds)
1 g (gram) = 0.035 oz (ounces)
Torques
1 Nm (Newton metre) = 0.737 ft. lbs. (foot-pounds)
Pressures
1 kp/cm² (kilopond/cm²) = 14.22 psi
1 bar = 14.29 psi
Force
1 N (Newton) = 0.225 lbs. (pounds)
1 hp (horse power) = 0.735 kW (kilowatt)
1 kW (kilowatt) = 1.36 hp (horse power)
1 hp (horse power) = 0.985 hp (horse power)
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-11

Technical data
6.16 Payloads
Telescopic boom with bucket
Retracted telescopic Extended telescopic

Bucket 1, 2
boom boom
Bucket capacity 0.6 m3 (2.12 ft³) as per ISO
Tipping load 2700 kg (5953 lbs.) 1400 kg (3086 lbs.)3
Payload 1350 kg (2976 lbs.) 700 kg (1543 lbs.)3
Telescopic length of telescopic boom 1150 mm (45.28 in)
Tilt-out height
Pin height - see Dimensions with bucket on page 6-13
Tilt reach
Tilt-in angle 40°
Tilt-out angle 40°
Breakout force of hydraulic lift cylinder 30.0 kN (22110 ft. lbs.)
Breakout force of hydraulic tilt cylinder 49.0 kN (36113 ft. lbs.)
2. With standard bucket 1000102344 (1750 mm) (68.9 in)
3. See safe load indicator
Telescopic boom with pallet forks
Fork arms (payloads stated Retracted telescopic Extended telescopic

for 500 mm load distance boom boom
Tipping load1 (ISO 8313) 2160 kg (4762 lbs.) 1190 kg (2624 lbs.)
Payload, safety factor 1.25 1730 kg (3814 lbs.) 950 kg (2094 lbs.)
Payload, safety factor 1.67 1290 kg (2844 lbs.) 700 kg (1543 lbs.)
Lift height - see Dimensions with pallet forks on page 6-14
Movable payload in transport position
2000 kg (4409 lbs.)
(safety factor 1.25)
Movable payload in transport position
1500 kg (3307 lbs.)
(safety factor 1.67)
1. See safe load indicator
6-12 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Technical data
6.17 Dimensions with bucket
760
1230
4660
4510
4000
3585
3435
3000
2480
2680
200
300
2230 1920 1350 1400
Fig. 222 : Machine dimensions 5500 1750
Dimensions
Overall length1 5500 mm (216.54 in)
2, 3
Overall height 2580 mm (101.57 in)
2
Overall height with rotating beacon 2680 mm (105.51 in)
Overall width without bucket4 1720 mm (67.72 in)
1
Overall width 1750 mm (68.90 in)
Ground clearance in transport position of telescopic
200 mm (7.87 in)
boom
Ground clearance2 below rear axle gearbox 300 mm (11.81 in)
Pin height2 retracted 3585 mm (141.14 in)
extended 4660 mm (183.46 in)
Load-over height2 retracted 3435 mm (135.23 in)
Tilt-out height2 retracted 3000 mm (118.11 in)
Tilt reach2 retracted 760 mm (29.92 in)
Track width front/rear 1400 mm (55.11 in)
Wheelbase center 1920 mm (75.59 in)
Turning radius5 2550 mm (100.39 in)
1. With standard bucket order no. 1000102344
3. With protective FOPS screen
4. With outside mirrors folded in
5. Measured at outer edge of wheel
BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b610.fm 6-13

Technical data
6.18 Dimensions with pallet forks
d
b
a
d
b
a
Fig. 223 : Machine dimensions with pallet forks
Wheel loader model

Pin height1
a Retracted 3585 mm (141.14 in)
Pallet height1
b Retracted 3360 mm (132.28 in)
c Tilt-in angle in transport position2 17 °
2
d Tilt-out angle 85°
2. With pallet forks order no. 1000101820 (1000 mm or 39.37 in)
Other dimensions
➥ - see Dimensions with bucket on page 6-13
6-14 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b610.fm

Index
Index
Index
A F
Accelerator pedal .....................................................................3-42 Filling the central lubrication system ........................................5-32
Air conditioning ........................................................................5-38 Fire extinguisher (option) .........................................................3-20
Air conditioning (option) ...........................................................3-60 Fitting pallet forks ...................................................................3-103
Air filter .....................................................................................5-16 Fitting the multipurpose bucket onto the quickhitch .................3-90
Alternator .................................................................................5-46 Fluids and lubricants ................................................................5-59
Anticorrosion protection ...........................................................5-55 Front socket (option) ................................................................3-54
Avoiding running the engine under low-load conditions ..........3-32 Fuel preheater (option) ............................................................3-28
B Fuel system
Additional fuel filter (option) .................................................5-7
Battery .....................................................................................5-43
Refueling .............................................................................5-5
Battery master switch (option) .................................................3-20
Functional check of all control elements ..................................3-38
Biodegradable oil .....................................................................5-25
Fuse box ....................................................................................6-6
Brake/inching pedal .................................................................3-45
Braking system ........................................................................5-33 G
Brake fluid ..........................................................................5-33 General safety instructions regarding the pallet forks ............3-106
Safety instructions .............................................................5-33 H
Brief description of the wheel loader ..........................................1-3
Hazard warning system ...........................................................3-57
Brief instructions for fork arms ...............................................3-108
Heating ....................................................................................3-59
C Heating system dust filter .........................................................5-37
Cabin .......................................................................................3-12 Hose burst valve ....................................................................3-116
Central lubrication system (option) ..........................................5-31 Hose burst valve - safety feature (option) ..............................3-116
Check lists ...............................................................................3-10 Hydraulic connections ..............................................................3-91
Checking the mounting bore of the attachment ............3-89, 3-103 I
Continuous operation
Important information
3rd control circuit (electrical, option) ..................................3-69
On the Operator’s Manual ...................................................1-1
3rd control circuit (mechanical, standard) ..........................3-68
Indicator lights and warning lights ..............................................3-6
Control lever
Instructions for machine travel on public roads ........................3-36
Unlocking ...........................................................................3-66
Interior light ..............................................................................3-56
D
K
Daily tire checks .......................................................................5-34
Key-based drive interlock .........................................................3-21
Dimensions with bucket ...........................................................6-13
Display element .........................................................................3-6 L
Disposal of machine ..............................................................3-125 Light system .............................................................................3-55
Driving on public roads Load stabilizer (option) .............................................................3-52
With the multipurpose bucket ............................................3-95 Loader unit
E Releasing the pressure on the quick couplers ...................3-71
Spraying oil onto the slide plates .......................................5-29
Electric units ..............................................................................6-6
Loading tie-bar .......................................................................3-119
Emergency lowering of the loader unit
Locking and unlocking the cabin window on the right ..............3-14
with the engine stopped ...........................................................3-70
Locking the control lever (joystick) and the 3rd control circuit
Engine
(attachments) when driving on roads .......................................3-39
Notices on starting .............................................................3-30
Locking/unlocking the door ......................................................3-12
Preparing to start the engine ....................................3-29, 3-30
Lowering the loader unit with the engine stopped ....................3-70
Low-speed control (option) ......................................................3-44
BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enSIX.fm S-1

Index
M O
Machine Oil preheater (option) ...............................................................3-28
Brief description ...................................................................1-3 Operation ...................................................................................3-1
Fields of application .............................................................1-5 3rd control circuit control lever ...........................................3-66
Loading and transporting .................................................3-121 Before starting the engine .................................................3-29
Overview ..............................................................................1-2 Cabin overview ....................................................................3-2
Machine travel on public roads Control lever (joystick) .......................................................3-65
With the pallet forks .........................................................3-105 Control lever for 3rd control circuit in
Maintenance continuous operation .........................................................3-68
Adding coolant ...................................................................5-14 Hose burst valve on tilt cylinder (option) ..........................3-116
Adding engine oil .................................................................5-9 Instrument panel overview ...................................................3-4
Adding hydraulic oil ...........................................................5-24 Load stabilizer (option) ......................................................3-52
Air filter cartridge ...............................................................5-17 Parking the machine ..........................................................3-51
Anticorrosive protection .....................................................5-56 Selecting a speed range ....................................................3-49
Biodegradable oil ...............................................................5-25 Starting machine travel ......................................................3-48
Braking system ..................................................................5-33 Starting the engine ............................................................3-29
Checking the coolant level .................................................5-13 Telescopic boom ...............................................................3-62
Checking the engine oil level ...............................................5-8 P
Checking the hydraulic oil level .........................................5-23
Pallet forks .............................................................................3-106
Cleaning ............................................................................5-49
Adjusting the fork arms ....................................................3-110
Electrical system ................................................................5-41
Approaching the material .................................................3-112
Engine and hydraulics cooling system ..............................5-10
Picking up a load .............................................................3-113
Engine lubrication system ....................................................5-8
Pallet forks load diagram .......................................................3-109
Fluids and lubricants ..........................................................5-59
Parking brake ................................................................... 3-47, 6-4
Fuel system .........................................................................5-4
Picking up loads with the pallet forks .....................................3-112
General cleaning and maintenance ...................................5-49
Pressure relief valve “plus powerflow” (option) ........................3-72
Heating and ventilation system ..........................................5-37
Putting into operation
Hydraulic pressure lines ....................................................5-26
Check lists .........................................................................3-10
Hydraulic system ...............................................................5-20
Safety instructions ...............................................................3-9
Maintenance if the machine is used
Putting the machine out of operation .....................................3-125
in a saline environment ......................................................5-55
Maintenance of attachments .............................................5-54 R
Pivots and hinges ..............................................................5-53 Removing
Servicing and maintenance at regular intervals .................5-45 The multipurpose bucket from the quickhitch ....................3-93
Threaded fittings ................................................................5-53 Retrofitting the telescopic boom ...............................................3-75
Tire care ............................................................................5-34 Rotating beacon .......................................................................3-58
V-belt .................................................................................5-18 Running-in period ......................................................................3-9
Maintenance plan ....................................................................5-62
Manual throttle (option) ............................................................3-43
Models and trade names
Overview ..............................................................................1-3
N
Noise levels .............................................................................1-10
S-2 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enSIX.fm

Index
S T
Safe load indicator ...................................................................3-62 Technical data ...........................................................................6-1
Display unit (overview) ......................................................3-63 Axles ....................................................................................6-3
Functional check ...............................................................3-63 Brakes .................................................................................6-4
Safety instructions Dimensions ........................................................................6-13
Locking the control lever (loader unit) Electrical system .................................................................6-6
and mechanical 3rd control circuit .....................................3-40 Engine .................................................................................6-1
Regarding work with a full bucket ......................................3-82 Frame ..................................................................................6-1
Regarding work with pallet forks loaded with material ....3-111 Noise levels .........................................................................6-9
Safety instructions regarding the safe load indicator ...............3-62 Operating hydraulics ...........................................................6-5
Seat .........................................................................................3-16 Pallet forks (standard) .......................................................6-12
Armrest adjustment ........................................................... 3-17 Pilot control ..........................................................................6-5
Backrest adjustment ..........................................................3-17 Steering system ...................................................................6-4
Height adjustment ............................................................. 3-17 Telescopic boom with bucket ............................................6-12
Horizontal adjustment ........................................................3-17 Tightening torques .............................................................6-10
Seat adjustment ................................................................3-16 Tires ....................................................................................6-8
Seat belt ............................................................................3-18 Vibration ..............................................................................6-9
Weight adjustment ............................................................. 3-16 Weights ...............................................................................6-8
Seat belt ..................................................................................3-18 Telescopic boom
Serial number ............................................................................1-7 Extending/raising ...............................................................3-73
Service brake ....................................................................3-45, 6-4 Lubrication .........................................................................5-30
Setting down a load ...............................................................3-115 Retract/lower .....................................................................3-74
Side window emergency exit ...................................................3-15 Telescopic loader dimensions with pallet forks ........................6-14
Signaling system .....................................................................3-57 Tires .........................................................................................5-34
Signs and symbols ..................................................................1-10 Towing the machine ..............................................................3-117
Starting aid .....................................................................3-33, 3-35 Transport .................................................................................3-84
Starting the engine ..................................................................3-31 Transporting loads with the pallet forks ......................3-114, 3-116
Steering system .......................................................................3-41 Turn indicators .........................................................................3-57
Synchronous wheel position ..............................................3-42 V
Stopping the engine .................................................................3-32
Ventilation ................................................................................3-59
Ventilation, fresh air ...........................................................3-59
W
Washer system ........................................................................3-61
Reservoir ...........................................................................3-61
Wheel change ..........................................................................5-35
Wipers .....................................................................................3-61
Working
Freeing the machine ..........................................................3-88
Grading ..............................................................................3-88
Loading loose material ......................................................3-84
Removing material/digging in hard soil .............................3-87
Removing material/digging in soft soil ...............................3-86
With the multipurpose bucket ............................................3-94
With the pallet forks .........................................................3-106
Working lights ..........................................................................3-56
Working with the telescopic boom ...........................................3-80
BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enSIX.fm S-3

Index
S-4 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enSIX.fm

KRAMER-WERKE GmbH keep abreast of the latest technical
developments and constantly improve their products. For this reason, we
may from time to time need to make changes to diagrams and descriptions
in this documentation which do not reflect products that have already been
delivered and that will not be implemented on these machines.
Technical data, dimensions and weights are only given as an indication.
Responsibility for errors or omissions not accepted.
No reproduction or translation of this publication, in whole or part, without
the written consent of KRAMER-WERKE GmbH.
All rights under the provision of the Copyright Act are reserved.
Kramer-Werke GmbH
D-88630 Pfullendorf
Germany
Wacker Neuson Corporation
P. O. Box 9007
Menomonee Falls, WI 53052-9007
Tel. (262) 255-0500

Fax: (262) 255-0550
Tel. (800) 770-0957
www.wackerneuson.com
Kramer-Werke GmbH
D-88630 Pfullendorf
Phone 0080090209020
E-mail [email protected]
www.kramer.de
Order no. 1000187267

Language [us]

Operator's Manual: Wheel Loader

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator's Manual: Wheel Loader

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator's Manual: Wheel Loader

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

Machine model 346-11

From serial no. 346 11 0001

Document number 1000187267

Documents Order no. Order no.

Copyright – 2014 Kramer-Werke GmbH

BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm I-1

Transportation .................................................................................................... 2-9

I-2 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm

Interrupting power supply ................................................................................ 3-20

BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm I-3

Braking with the brake/inching pedal ............................................................... 3-46

I-4 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm

Retracting/lowering the telescopic boom ......................................................... 3-74

BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm I-5

Working with the pallet forks ................................................................................ 3-106

I-6 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm

Checking the coolant level ............................................................................... 5-13

BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm I-7

Cleaning inside the cabin ................................................................................. 5-50

I-8 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm

Dimensions with bucket ........................................................................................ 6-13

BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm I-9

I-10 BA 34611 US - Ausgabe 2.0 * 34611b20_us_enIVZ.fm

Travel direction in drawings or figures.

BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-1

1.2 Machine overview

Pos. Designation Pos. Designation

1-2 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

1.3 Models and trade names (overview)

1.4 Brief description of the wheel loader

Main components of machine

BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-3

Operating hydraulics and 4 wheel steering

1-4 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

Attachments with certified material densities

Tele- ISO 7546

Picking up, transporting and loading

Grading, removing and scraping

BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-5

Tele- ISO 7546

1000101820 1000 mm (39.37 in)

800 – 1800 mm Picking up and transporting round

Picking up and transporting

Digging and transporting nursery

Scarifying dense soil, loosening

Rotary broom2, 3, 4, 6 346-11 1000139717 - - Cleaning roads and facilities

Snow plow2, 3, 4, 6 346-11 1000142915 - - Winter service

For repair, assembly, disassembly,

1-6 BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * * 34611b110.fm

1.6 Type labels and component numbers

Fig. 2 : Serial number

Cabin registration number

Fig. 4 : Cabin registration number

Engine serial number

Example: Deutz D2011 L04 W

Fig. 5 : Diesel engine serial number

BA 34611 US – Edition 2.0 * 34611b110.fm 1-7

Serial number of hydraulic pump